Dell 1355cnw User's Guide 1507920921dell 1355cn Cwn En Us

1507920878dell-1355cn-cwn_user's guide_en-us DELL 1355CNW pdf | FreeUserManuals.com

User Manual: Dell DELL 1355CN pdf | FreeUserManuals.com

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 522

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction
Color Printer
User's Guide

www.dell.com | support.dell.com

Contents
Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color
Printer ............................................................1
User's Guide .................................................1
Before Beginning .......................................19
A Notes, Notices, and Cautions

. . . . . . . . .

21

1

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer
User's Guide 23

2

Finding Information

3
4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Product Features .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

About the Printer .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

Front View

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

Rear View

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34

Space Requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

34

1

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Operator Panel .

. . . . . . . . . . .

36

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

Securing the Printer
Ordering Supplies

Setting Up Printer (Printer Setup) ...........39
5

Removing Packaging Material

. . . . . . . .

41

6

Connecting Your Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

43

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network
Direct Connection

. . . . . .

44

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44

Network Connection
Turning On the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47

Connecting the Telephone Line

7

Setting the IP Address

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

48

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

. . . . .

51

. . . . . . . .

53

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55

Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)
The Operator Panel .
The Tool Box

Verifying the IP Settings .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page .
The Operator Panel .

2

Contents

56

. . .

57

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57

The Tool Box

8

9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

59

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

66

Loading Paper

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running
Windows 69
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status (For Network Connection
Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

Disabling the firewall before installing your printer

70

The Operator Panel
The Tool Box

Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD .
Direct Connection Setup

. . . . . . . . . .

70

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71

For installing host-based printer driver

. . . . . .

71

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver 71
Network Connection Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network

. . . .

Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network

. . .

74
74
79

Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color
Printer Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Settings 86
Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Settings 88
Setting up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your
Computer (When you need to setup your wireless connectivity
with your computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting Up for Shared Printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

107

3

Point and Print
Peer-to-Peer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running
Macintosh 117
Installing the Drivers and Software .

. . . . . . . . . .

117

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s) 117
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11

. . . . . . .

118

Using Your Printer ...................................121
11 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Overview .

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

127

. . . . . . . . . .

129

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Top Frame .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Left Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130

Right Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132

Page Display Format .

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items .

. . . . . . .

133

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

133

Printer Status

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135

Printer Jobs .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

137

Details of the Menu Items

Printer Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Server Settings
Contents

125
126

Setting Up From Operator Panel

4

123

. .

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Setting Up From Web Browser

123

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138
160

Print Volume

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

179

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

179

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

186

Address Book
Tray Settings

12 Print Media Guidelines
Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

189
189

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paper Characteristics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

189

Recommended Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

190

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

191

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

191

Unacceptable Paper
Selecting Paper

Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead .

. . .

192

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193

Printing on Letterhead
Loading Letterhead .

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper

. . . . . . . . . . .

193

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

194

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195

Envelopes
Labels

Storing Print Media

196

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .

196

Supported Paper Sizes .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

196

Supported Paper Types

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

198

Identifying Print Media and Specifications

Paper Type Specifications

13 Loading Print Media
Capacity

199

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Media Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201
201

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 202
Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 207
Contents

5

Loading Letterhead

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

210

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 211
Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 214
Loading Letterhead

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

217

Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer Driver Only) 218
The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

. . . . . . . . . .

218

The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

. . . . . . . . . .

219

. . . . . . . . . . . .

221

Using the Output Tray Extension

14 Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Operator Panel Buttons .

. . . . . . . . . . .

223

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

225

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

225

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

225

Printing a Panel Settings Page
The Operator Panel .
The Tool Box

223

Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 227
15 Printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for Successful Printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229
229

. . . . . . . . . . . .

229

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

Sending a Job to Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

Canceling a Print Job

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

230

Tips on Storing Print Media
Avoiding Paper Jams .

Canceling From the Operator Panel

. . . . . . . .

230

Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows 230

6

Contents

Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device

. . . . . .

231

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

231

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

232

Supported File Formats
Printing a Report Page

. . . . . . . . .

232

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

232

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

233

Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings

233

Adjusting the Language

233

Printing a System Settings Page .
The Operator Panel
Printer Settings

16 Copying

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper for Copying
Preparing a Document

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

Making Copies From the Document Glass

. . . . . . .

235

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

237

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238

Making Copies From the ADF
Setting Copy Options
Number of Copies
Color

235

Collated .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reduce/Enlarge

240

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

241

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242

Document Size
Original Type

Lighter/Darker
Sharpness

239

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

243

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

244

Auto Exposure
Multiple-Up .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

244

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

245

Margin Top/Bottom .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

247

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

248

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

249

Margin Left/Right .
Margin Middle

Contents

7

Changing the Default Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option

17 Scanning

. . . . . . . . .

250

253

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning Overview

250

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

253

Scanning From the Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . .

254

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver

. . . . . . . . . . .

255

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver 257
Using a Scanner on the Network
Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . .

259

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

259

Confirming a Login name and Password .

. . . . .

Specifying a Destination to Store the Document
Configuring the Printer Settings

.

262

. . . . . . . . . .

271

Sending the Scanned File on the Network .
Scanning to USB Storage Device

. . . .

279

. . . . . . . . . . . .

280

Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image
Setting an E-Mail Address Book

. . . . . .

281

. . . . . . . . . .

281

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File

18 Faxing

282

285

. . . .

285

Keypad Letters and Numbers

. . . . . . . . . . .

285

Changing Numbers or Names

. . . . . . . . . . .

286

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

Inserting a Pause .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

Configuring Fax Initial Settings
Setting Your Country
Contents

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters

8

261

Setting the Printer ID .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

287

Setting the Time and Date

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

288

Changing the Clock Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

289

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

289

Setting Sounds

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

289

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

Speaker Volume
Ringer Volume

Specifying the Fax Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Fax Settings Options
Available Fax Settings Options .

290

. . . . . . . . . .

291

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

294

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

296

Advanced Fax Settings .
Sending a Fax

290

. . . . . . . .

Loading an Original Document on the ADF

. . . .

296

Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass 296
Resolution

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Document Type .
Lighter/Darker

298

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

299

Sending a Fax Automatically .
Sending a Fax Manually

. . . . . . . . . . .

299

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

300

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

301

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

302

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

302

Confirming Transmissions
Automatic Redialing
Sending a Delayed Fax

. . . . . . .

303

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

303

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)
Example

298

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About Receiving Modes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes

. . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode

. .

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode

308
308
308
309
309

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans/Fax
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Contents

9

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone 309
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode

. . . . . .

310

. . . . . . . . . .

311

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Polling Receive
Automatic Dialing

Speed Dialing .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storing a Number for Speed Dialing

. . . . . . . .

311

. . . . . . . . .

312

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial
Group Dialing

311

Setting Group Dial

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

314

Editing Group Dial

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

314

Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)
316
Printing an Address Book List
Other Ways to Fax

. . . . . . . . . . .

316

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

316

. . . . . . . .

316

. . . . . . . . . . .

318

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

Using the Secure Receiving Mode .
Using an Answering Machine
Using a Computer Modem
Printing a Report .

Changing Setting Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

Know Your Printer ...................................321
19 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Printer Settings Report

Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323
324

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

327

Menu Settings

10

323

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Information
Reports

. . .

TCP/IP Settings .
Tray Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

328

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

328

Defaults Settings
Fax Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

329

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

331

Printer Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

333

System Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

333

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

336

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

336

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

337

Date & Time
Paper Density
Adjust BTR

Adjust Fuser

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registration Adjustment

338

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

338

Adjust Altitude

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

340

Reset Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

340

Non-Dell Toner

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

341

BTR Refresh Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Web Link Customization

342

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

342

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343

TCP/IP Settings .
Tray Settings

341

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Scan Defaults
Fax Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

345

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

347

Copy Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

348

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

351

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

356

Fax Settings
Diagnosis

Chart Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Environment Sensor Info .
Clean Developer

356

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

356

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

356

Refresh Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

357

Resetting Defaults .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

357

Contents

11

20 Understanding the Printer Menus .
Defaults Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

359

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

359

Scan Defaults .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

364

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

369

USB Print Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

371

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

371

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

371

Tray Settings
MPF

Reports/List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Settings
Panel Settings
Job History

373
374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Protocol Monitor

374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

374

Address Book .
Fax Activity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375

Phone Book .
Network

373

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Color Test Page

Admin Menu

373

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Error History

Fax Settings .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

391
396

Secure Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

402

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

404

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

404

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

405

Scan to EMail .
USB Settings
Panel Language

381

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Settings

Panel Lock Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enabling the Panel Lock

Contents

359

Copy Defaults .
Fax Defaults

12

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

405
405

Disabling the Panel Lock .
Resetting Defaults .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

406

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407

21 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows
Only) 409
Printer Status Window
Status Monitor Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

409

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

409

Dell Supplies Management System
Software Update

. . . . . . . .

409

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

410

Quick Launch Utility

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

410

Address Book Editor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

412

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

413

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

413

ScanButton Manager
ScanDirect

User Setup Disk Creating Tool

413

. . . . . . . . . . .

22 Understanding Printer Messages

. . . . .

415

23 Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD) 425
Adding Roles of Print Services
Printer Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

425

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

426

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard 426

24 Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating System Compatibility

. . . . . . . . . . . .

429

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

429

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430

Power Supply
Dimensions

429

Contents

13

Memory

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

431

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

431

MIB Compatibility
Environment
Cables

Copier Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanner Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facsimile Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

432
433
434

Maintaining Your Printer .......................437
25 Maintaining Your Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Determining the Status of Supplies

. . . . . . . . . . .

439

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

439

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

440

Conserving Supplies .
Storing Print Media

Storing Consumables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing Toner Cartridges

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

441
442

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

444

. . . .

448

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

450

Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor
Adjusting Color Registration
Contents

441

. . . . . . . . . .

Installing a Toner Cartridge
Cleaning Inside the Printer

440

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the Toner Cartridges

14

439

Performing Auto Adjust

450

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing the Color Registration Chart

. . . . . . .

451

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

452

Entering Values .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

453

Cleaning the Scanner

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

454

Determining Values

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller

26 Clearing Jams
Avoiding Jams .

456

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

459
459

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .

460

. . . . . . . . . .

461

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams .
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF .

Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer .

. .

465

Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer .

. .

467

. . . . . .

470

Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray .

Troubleshooting .......................................475
27 Troubleshooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Printer Problems

477

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

477

Display Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

477

Printing Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

478

Print Quality Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The output is too light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

480
480

Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side 481
Contents

15

Random spots/Blurred images
The entire output is blank

. . . . . . . . . . .

482

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

483

Streaks appear on the output
Pitched color dots

483

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

484

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

484

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

485

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

486

Vertical blanks
Ghosting
Fog

. . . . . . . . . . .

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)
Auger mark

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

487

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

487

Wrinkled/Stained paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The top margins is incorrect

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Color registration is out of alignment

489

. . . . . . .

490

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

491

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

492

Protrudent / Bumpy paper
Jam .

488

Misfeed jam

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi-feed jam

492

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

493

Copy Problem

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

494

Fax Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

494

Scanning Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
Other Problems

496

. . . . . . . .

499

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

500

Contacting Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

500

Appendix ...................................................501
B Appendix

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dell Technical Support Policy .

16

Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

503
503

Online Services

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

504

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

504

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

504

Warranty and Return Policy .
Recycling Information
Contacting Dell

503

Contents

17

18

Contents

Before Beginning

19

20

Notes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your printer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data
and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury,

or death.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft,
Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Adobe is either a registered
trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by
Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such
intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This
product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright ©
2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES
software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright ©
1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little
cms): Copyright © 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities
claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in
trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.

____________________

Notes, Notices, and Cautions

21

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication,
or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii)
of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
November 2010 Rev. A00

22

Notes, Notices, and Cautions

1

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw
Multifunction Color Printer User's
Guide

Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and
operation of your printer. For information on other documentation included
with your printer, see "Finding Information" on page 25.
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
1 Double-click the icon on your desktop.

If you cannot find the icon on your desktop, follow the procedure below.
a

Navigate to x:\abc\Dell Printers\Dell 1355 Multifunction Color
Printer\Reorder, where x:\abc is the location where the printer
software is installed.

b

Click the file dl1armm.exe.

c

Click File on the toolbar.

d

Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click
Desktop(create shortcut) on the submenu that appears.

2 Visit the Dell Printer Supplies website at www.dell.com/supplies, or order
Dell printer supplies by phone.
For best service, have your Dell printer Service Tag ready.
To locate the Service Tag of your printer, see "Express Service Code and
Service Tag" on page 27.

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide

23

24

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide

2

Finding Information

NOTE: The USB cable and the Ethernet cable are not shipped with your printer.
What are you looking for?

Find it here

• Drivers for my printer

Drivers and Utilities CD

• My User's Guide

The Drivers and Utilities CD contains setup video,
documentation, and drivers for your printer. You can
use the CD to install/re-install drivers or access your
setup video and documentation.
Readme files may be included on your CD to provide
last-minute updates about technical changes to your
printer or advanced technical reference material for
experienced users or technicians.
• How to use my printer

Quick Reference Guide

Finding Information

25

What are you looking for?

Find it here

• Safety information

Product Information Guide

• Warranty information

CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide prior to setting up and
operating your printer.
How to set up my printer

Setup diagram

Troubleshooting

"Troubleshooting" on page 477

26

Finding Information

What are you looking for?
Express Service Code and
Service Tag

Find it here
Service Tag
xxxxxxx

Express Service Code
000 000 000 00

The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located
inside the side door of your printer.
• Latest drivers for my printer Go to support.dell.com
• Answers to technical service support.dell.com provides several online tools,
and support questions
including:
• Documentation for my
printer

• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips,
articles from technicians, and online courses
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for
components, such as printer driver
• Customer Care — Contact information, order
status, warranty, and repair information
• Downloads — Drivers
• Manuals — Printer documentation and product
specifications
Go to support.dell.com. Select your region and fill in
the requested details to access help tools and
information.

Finding Information

27

28

Finding Information

3

Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.

Scanning to a USB Storage Device

Multiple-Up (2-in-1 Copy)

With Dell 1355cn/1355cnw
Multifunction Color Printer, you don't
need a PC to connect your USB storage
device to save the scanned data. Insert
your USB storage device in the port on
the printer, and save the scanned data
directly to your USB storage device.
For more information, see "Scanning to
USB Storage Device" on page 280.

N-up Print enables you to print multiple
pages on a single sheet of paper. This
feature allows you to reduce the paper
consumption.
For more information, see "Multiple-Up"
on page 245.

Product Features

29

2-Sided (Manual Duplex Print)

Print From USB Memory
(USB Direct Print)

Manual Duplex Print is to print two or
more pages on the front and back
side of a single sheet of paper manually.
This feature allows you to reduce the
paper consumption.
For more information, see "Manual
Duplex Printing (Windows Printer
Driver Only)" on page 218.

Print From USB Memory feature allows
you to print directly from your USB
storage device without starting your
computer. Without requiring you to
start your computer and an application,
this feature allows quick printing with
simple procedures.
For more information, see "Direct Print
Using the USB Storage Device" on
page 231.

30

Product Features

Printing Through Wireless Connection
(Wireless Print)

The Wireless LAN feature on your
printer allows you to install the printer at
any location, and enables printing
without a wired connection to your
computer.
For more information, see "Configuring
Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw
Multifunction Color Printer Only)" on
page 85.

Product Features

31

32

Product Features

4

About the Printer

This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Color
Multifunction Printer.

Front View
1

2

3 4 5

6

9

14

13 12 11 10

9 8

7

1

Operator Panel

2

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

3

Document Feeder Tray

4

Document Output Tray

5

Toner Access Cover

6

Print Head Cleaning Rod

7

Power Switch

8

Front Cover

9

Paper Width Guides

10

Length Guide

11

MPF Extension

12

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

13

Front USB Port

14

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

About the Printer

33

Rear View
1
12

11
10
9
8

2
3
4
5

7

6

1

ADF Cover

2

Ethernet Port

3

USB Port

4

Wall Jack Connector

5

Phone Connector

6

Security Slot

7

Rear Cover

8

Transfer Roller

9

Paper Chute

10

Paper Feed Roller

11

Transfer Belt

12

Fuser Release Lever

Space Requirements
Place the printer at a location such that there is adequate space for using the
printer feeder and covers.

34

About the Printer

100 mm/3.94 inches

596 mm/23.46 inches

132 mm/5.20 inches

262.5 mm/10.33 inches

410 mm/16.14 inches
379 mm/14.92 inches

338 mm/13.31 inches

292.5 mm/11.52 inches

To avoid irregular screen image or malfunctioning of your printer, avoid
placing the printer in direct sunlight with the single sheet feeder opened.

About the Printer

35

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
3
1

2

4

1

ADF Cover

2

Document Guides

3

Document Glass

4

Document Feeder Tray

Operator Panel

For more information on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on
page 223.

Securing the Printer
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.

36

About the Printer

Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.

Security slot

For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.

Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked
printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser, launch the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to
order toner for your printer.
You can also order toner cartridges by the following method:
1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers  Additional Color Software
 Dell Supplies Management System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If ordering from the web:
a

Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.

b

Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
The Dell 1355 Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System
screen appears.

c

Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK.
The Service Tag is located inside the toner access cover of your printer.
About the Printer

37

Dell supplies web site appears.
Service Tag
xxxxxxx

Express Service Code
000 000 000 00

If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone
section.

38

About the Printer

Setting Up Printer
(Printer Setup)

39

40

Removing Packaging Material

5

1 Remove the packaging material from the printer.

2 Lift and open the document cover.

3 Remove the protective sheet from the ADF Glass.

Removing Packaging Material

41

42

Removing Packaging Material

6

Connecting Your Printer

Your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Color Multifunction Printer interconnection
cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type

Connection specifications

Wireless

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g

USB

USB 2.0 compatible

Ethernet

10 Base-T/100 Base-TX compatible

Wall jack connector

RJ11

Phone connector

RJ11

1
2
3
4

Connecting Your Printer

43

1 Ethernet Port

2 USB Port
3 Wall Jack Connector

4 Phone Connector

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network
Direct Connection
A local printer is a printer which is directly attached to your computer using
the USB cable. If your printer is attached to a network instead of your
computer, skip this section and go to "Network Connection" on page 45.
USB Cable

The following operating systems support USB connection:

44

•

Microsoft® Windows® XP

•

Microsoft Windows XP 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server® 2003

•

Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

•

Windows Server 2008

•

Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008 R2

•

Windows Vista®

•

Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

Connecting Your Printer

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 7 64-bit Edition

•

Mac OS® X 10.4.11/10.5/10.6

To attach the printer to a computer:
1 Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are
turned off and unplugged from the power source/outlet.
2 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the
printer.
USB port

3 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.
NOTE: Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB connector available
on the keyboard.

Network Connection
To connect the printer to a network:
1 Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices have
been turned off and all cables have been disconnected.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable.

Connecting Your Printer

45

Ethernet port

NOTE: Connect the Ethernet cable, only if you need to setup a wired connection.
To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable
into the Ethernet port at the rear of the printer, and the other end to a LAN
drop or hub.
To setup a wireless connection, see "Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell
1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer Only)" on page 85.

46

Connecting Your Printer

Turning On the Printer
CAUTION: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
CAUTION: The printer should not be connected to a UPS system.
1 Connect the power cable to the wall jack connector on the rear of your
printer (see "Rear View" on page 34).

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the power source.
3 Turn on the printer.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions in the operator panel to configure the
initial settings of your printer.
Connecting Your Printer

47

Connecting the Telephone Line
NOTE: Do not connect your printer directly to a DSL (digital subscriber line). This
may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter.
Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.
1 Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the
other end to an active wall jack.

Wall jack connector

To the wall jack

2 Remove the blue plug from the phone connector.
Phone connector

Blue plug

3 To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the
telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector ( ).
48

Connecting Your Printer

Phone connector

To an external telephone
or answering machine

If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany,
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), and
you are supplied with a yellow terminator, insert the yellow terminator into
the phone connector ( ).

Phone connector

Yellow terminator

Connecting Your Printer

49

50

Connecting Your Printer

Setting the IP Address

7

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, and time when you
turn on printer for the first time.
When you turn on the printer, a wizard appears on the operator panel. Follow
the steps below to set the initial settings.
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Ready appears on the
operator panel in three minutes. After that, you can set the following initial setup by
enabling Power on Wizard on the operator panel or Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool if needed.
For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on
page 359.
For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" on page 123.
1 Ensure that Please Select Language is highlighted, and then
select the language you want to use on the operator panel from the
following drop-down list, and then press the
button.

English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska

2 Press the

button to start setting the country.

Setting the IP Address

51

3 Ensure that Please Select Country is highlighted. Select your
country from the drop-down list, and then press the
button.
4 Ensure that Please Select Time Zone is highlighted. Select the
appropriate time zone from the following drop-down list, and then press
the
button.

UTC -12:00
UTC -11:00
UTC -10:00
UTC -09:00
UTC -08:00
UTC -07:00
UTC -06:00
UTC -05:00
UTC -04:00
UTC -03:30
UTC -03:00
UTC -02:00
UTC -01:00
UTC 00:00
UTC +01:00
UTC +02:00
UTC +03:00
UTC +03:30
UTC +04:00
UTC +04:30
UTC +05:00
UTC +05:30
UTC +05:45
UTC +06:00

52

Setting the IP Address

UTC +06:30
UTC +07:00
UTC +08:00
UTC +09:00
UTC +09:30
UTC +10:00
UTC +11:00
UTC +12:00
UTC +13:00

5 Press the
button until Please Enter Date is highlighted. Specify
the current date, and then press the
button.
6 Press the
button until Please Enter Time is highlighted. Specify
the current time, and then press the
button.
7 Press the

button for Fax Setup.

If you want to skip the Fax Setup, press the
restart the printer.

(Start) button and then

8 Press the
button until Please Enter Fax Number is
highlighted. enter your fax number, and then press the
button.
9 Press the
button until Please Enter Name is highlighted. Enter a
name, and then press the
button.
10 Press the

button, and then restart the printer.

Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 Mode, use the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. To open the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the
link local address. To check a link local address, see "Printing and Checking the
Printer Settings Page" on page 57.
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are
delimited by a period and can include up to three digits in each section, for
example, 111.222.33.44.

Setting the IP Address

53

Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance
issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is
normally done by a system administrator.
NOTE: Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may
be different. On Class A, for example, an IP address in the range from 0.0.0.0 to
127.255.255.255 will be assigned. For assignment of IP addresses, contact
your system administrator.
You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or using the tool
box.

The Operator Panel
For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on
page 223.
1 Turn on the printer.
Ensure that Ready message appears on the LCD panel.
2 Press the

(Menu) button.

3 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Network is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the
button.

button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the

7 Press the
button.

button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the

8 Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted, and then press the
button.
9 Ensure that Panel is highlighted, and then press the

button.

10 Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted.
11 Press the
button until IP Address is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
54

Setting the IP Address

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the IP address.
12 Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad.
13 Press the

button.

The next three digits are highlighted.
14 Repeat step 12 and step 13 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and
then press the
button.
15 Ensure that IP Address is highlighted.
16 Press the
button until Subnet Mask is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the subnet mask.
17 Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad.
18 Press the

button.

The next three digits are highlighted.
19 Repeat step 17 and step 18 to set subnet mask, and then press the
button.
20 Press the

button and ensure that Subnet Mask is highlighted.

21 Press the
press the

button until Gateway Address is highlighted, and then
button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the gateway address.
22 Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad.
23 Press the

button.

The next three digits are highlighted.
24 Repeat step 22 and step 23 to set gateway address, and then press the
button.
25 Turn off and turn on the printer.

The Tool Box
NOTE: When you use IPv6 Mode for network printing, the Tool Box cannot be used
to assign an IP address.

Setting the IP Address

55

1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers  Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer  Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer

drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.
4 Select the mode from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address.
5 Press the Apply New Settings button to take effect.
The IP address is assigned to your printer. To verify the setting, open the web
browser on any computer connected to the network and enter the IP address
into the address bar on the browser. If the IP address is set up correctly, the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool displays in your browser.
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer
drivers with installer. When you use the Network Installation feature, and the
Get IP Address is set to AutoIP on the operator panel menu, you can
set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer
selection window.

Verifying the IP Settings
1 Print the printer settings page.
See "Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page" on page 57.
2 Look under the TCP/IP heading on the printer settings page to ensure
that the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are appropriate.
To verify if the printer is active on the network, run the ping command in
your computer:
1 Click Start, and select Run.
2 Type cmd, and then press OK.
A black window is displayed.
56

Setting the IP Address

3 Type ping xx.xx.xx.xx (where xx.xx.xx.xx is the IP address of
your printer).
4 Reply from the IP address denotes printer is active on the network.

Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page
Print the printer settings page and check your printer's IP address.

The Operator Panel
1 Press the
2 Press the
button.

(Menu) button.
button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
The system settings page is printed.
5 Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network on the
printer settings page. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes
to resolve the IP address automatically, and then print the system settings
page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.

The Tool Box
NOTE:
1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers  Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer  Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer drivers
are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
Setting the IP Address

57

The Reports page is displayed.
4 Click the Printer Settings button.
The printer settings page is printed.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign an IP address for your
printer, see "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.

58

Setting the IP Address

8

Loading Paper

NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the priority sheet inserter while a
printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.
NOTE: For printing envelopes, see "Loading Print Media" on page 201.

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)
1 Open the front cover by pulling out the instruction sheet.

2 Pull the priority sheet inserter (PSI) out.

Loading Paper

59

3 Remove the instruction sheet attached to the PSI with adhesive tape.

NOTE: Read the instruction sheet before you use the PSI.
4 Pull the length guide forward until it stops.

60

Loading Paper

5 Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.

6 Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum width.

Loading Paper

61

7 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

8 Load paper on the MPF with the top edge first and with the recommended
print side facing up.

62

Loading Paper

9 Adjust the width guides and length guides until they rest lightly against
the edges of the stack of print media.

10 Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.

Loading Paper

63

NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension

backward until it stops, and then pinch the length guide and slide it backward
until it touches print media.

64

Loading Paper

11 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on
the paper tray.

Loading Paper

65

12 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is
not standard plain paper. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the
MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter
(PSI)
1 Open the front cover.

2 Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper
tray.

66

Loading Paper

3 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

4 Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the
recommended print side facing up.

Loading Paper

67

5 Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the
stack of print media.

6 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is
not standard plain paper. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the
PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.

68

Loading Paper

Installing Printer Drivers on
Computers Running Windows

9

Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status (For
Network Connection Setup)
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, print the printer
settings page to check the IP address of your printer.

The Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
The system settings page is printed.
5 Find the IP address under Wired Network/Wireless Network on the printer
settings page.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP
address automatically, and then print the system settings page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.

The Tool Box
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Tool Box.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the

Select Printer window opens. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355cnw
Color MFP listed in Printer Name.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list on the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page appears.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see
"Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.

Disabling the firewall before installing your printer
NOTE: For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 or 3 must be installed.
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must disable
the firewall before installing the Dell printer software:
•

Windows 7

•

Windows Vista

•

Windows Server 2008 R2

•

Windows Server 2008

•

Windows XP

1 Click Start Help and Support.
NOTE: For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 operating systems, if you
use Online Help, switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support
window.

2 In the Search box, type firewall and then press Enter.
In the list, click Turn Windows Firewall on or off and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
Enable the firewall after the installation of the Dell printer software is
complete.

Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD
1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to start Easy Setup
Navigator.
70

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start All Programs (for
Windows Vista and Windows 7) Accessories (for Windows Vista and
Windows 7) Run, and then type D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is
the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.

Direct Connection Setup
For installing host-based printer driver
1 Click Software Installation.
2 Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer
with a USB cable, and then turn the printer on.
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds
to the next page automatically.
NOTE: If the installation software does not automatically proceed to the next
page, click Install.

4 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
USB Printing

A personal printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server
using a USB. If your printer is attached to a network and not your computer,
see "Network Connection Setup" on page 74.

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver
NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com/support.
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7,
Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

71

4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box. To use this printer as the default printer, select the check box
displayed under the Printer name. Click Next.
Installation starts.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise,
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page.
12 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box.

72

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box. Click Next.
Installation starts.
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network
can find and use it. Click Next.
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page.
13 Click Finish.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click Add a local or network
printer as an administrator.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise,
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

5 Click Add a local printer.
6 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
7 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
8 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
9 Click OK.
10 Select your printer name and click Next.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
Installation starts.
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network
can find and use it. Click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

73

13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
14 Click Finish.

Network Connection Setup
Network Printer Setup on a Local Network
For installing host-based printer driver

1 Click Software Installation.
2 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
4 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click
Next. If the target printer is not displayed on the list, click Refresh to
refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually.
You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select I am
setting up this printer on a server check box.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can
continue, you must enter a valid IP address.

NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows
Security Alert is displayed:
•

Windows Vista

•

Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008

•

Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 7 64-bit Edition

To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or
Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
5 Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.
74

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

a

Enter the printer name.

b

If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select
Share this printer with other computers on the network, and then
enter a share name that users can identify.

c

If you want to set a printer as the default, select the Set this printer as
default check box.

6 Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click
Next. You can specify folders in which to install the Dell software and
documentation. To change the folders, click Browse.
7 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com/support.
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7,
Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click
Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device for Device type, and enter the IP address for
Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click
Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise,
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

75

10 Select your printer name and click Next.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
Installation starts.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise,
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page.
13 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click
Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for
Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click
Continue.
8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
10 Select your printer name and click Next.

76

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
Installation starts.
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network
can find and use it. Click Next.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page.
14 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 R2
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by
name or TCP/IP address screen appears. Find your printer on this screen.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise,
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
8 Select your printer name and click Next.
9 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
10 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network
can find and use it.
11 Click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

77

Installation starts.
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
13 Click Finish.
Windows 7 or Windows 7 64-bit Edition
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click
Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for
Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise,
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
10 Select your printer name and click Next.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
Installation starts.
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
13 Click Finish.

78

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

NOTE: You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail
when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
For more information about E-Mail Alert, see "E-Mail Alert" on page 126.

Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network
Before Installation

Before you start remote installation, perform the following procedures.
Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista,
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows Server 2008:
1 Click Start  All Programs (for Windows Vista only)  Accessories (for
Windows Vista only)  Run.
2 Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration  Administrative Templates  Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select
Properties.
5 On the Setting tab, select Enabled, and then click OK.
6 Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1 Click Start  All Programs (for Windows 7 only)  Accessories (for
Windows 7 only)  Run.
2 Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration  Administrative Templates  Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select
Edit.
5 Select Enabled, and then click OK.
6 Restart the computer.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

79

Share the Firewall File and Printer

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows
Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows XP:
1 Click start  Control Panel.
2 Select Security Center.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and
then click OK.
For Windows Vista:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select Security.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 Click Change settings.
5 Click Continue.
6 On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and
then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Double-click Windows Firewall.
3 Click Change settings.
4 On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and
then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select System and Security.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 Click Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall.
5 If the check boxes under Allowed programs and features: are dimmed,
click Change settings, and then click Yes.
80

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

6 Check the Name check box. Home/Work (Private) or Public check box is
automatically selected according to your settings.
If File and Printer Sharing Properties dialog box appears, click OK.
7 Click OK.
Start Remote Registry

NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,
Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select System and Maintenance (System and Security for Windows 7).
3 Click Administrative Tools.
4 Double-click Services.
5 Click Continue (for Windows Vista only).
6 Right-click Remote Registry and select Start.
7 Right-click Remote Registry and select Properties.
8 Change Startup type: to Automatic, and then click OK.
Disable User Account Control

NOTE: Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to
virus attacks.
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008
R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows Vista:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
5 Click Continue.
6 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your
computer check box.
7 Click OK.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

81

8 Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Double-click User Accounts.
3 Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
4 Click Continue.
5 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your
computer check box.
6 Click OK.
7 Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Change User Account Control settings.
5 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6 Click Yes.
7 Click OK.
8 Click Yes.
9 Restart the computer.
For Windows 7:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Change User Account Control Settings.
5 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6 Click Yes in User Account Control dialog box.
7 Restart the computer.

82

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks

NOTE: This step is required when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition for the server computer.
For Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2
1 Click Start  Control Panel  Network and Internet  Network and
Sharing Center  Change advanced sharing settings.
2 To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other
computers on the network to share the files and folders on your computer,
click Turn on network discovery.
3 Click Save changes.
4 If you see the User Account Control dialog box, click Yes.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition:
1 Click Start  Network.
2 Right-click Network and select Properties.
The Network an Sharing Center screen appears.
3 Click the down arrow button next to either Network discovery.
4 To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other
computers on the network to share the files and folders on your computer,
click Turn on network discovery.
5 Click Apply.
6 If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
Disable Simple File Sharing

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, and Windows XP 64-bit Edition.
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select Appearance and Themes.
3 Select Folder Options.
4 On the View tab, clear the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check
box, and then click OK.
5 Click Start  Control Panel.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

83

6 Select Performance and Maintenance.
7 Select Administrative Tools.
8 Double-click Local Security Policy.
9 Click Local Policies  Security Options.
10 Right-click Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts
and select Properties.
11 Ensure that Classic - local users authenticate as themselves is selected.
12 Click OK.
Installing the Printer Driver

NOTE: Installation on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic,
Windows Vista Home Premium, Windows Vista x64 Home Basic, Windows Vista x64
Home Premium, Windows 7 Starter, Windows 7 Home Basic, Windows 7 Home
Premium, Windows 7 x64 Home Basic, and Windows 7 x64 Home Premium is not
supported.
1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your
computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.
2 Click Software Installation.
The Install Printer Driver and Software screen appears.
3 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
4 Select Remote Installation, and then click Next.
5 Enter the Administrator user name and password of the client computer,
then select the clients or servers, and then Next.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows
Security Alert is displayed:

84

•

Windows Vista

•

Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008

•

Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 7 64-bit Edition

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or
Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
6 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in Select Printer, and then click
Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in Select Printer, try the
following steps:
•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter a port name (any alphanumeric string)
and an existing IP address for the printer.

7 Select the required items on the Software and Documentation, and then
click Install.
8 Click Finish to exit this tool.

Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw
Multifunction Color Printer Only)
This section describes how to configure wireless settings through Easy Setup
Navigator.
The specifications of wireless setting function are described below:
Item

Specification

Connectivity

Wireless

Connectivity Standard

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g compliant

Bandwidth

2.4 GHz

Data Transfer Rate

802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps

Security

WEP (64/128bits), WPA-PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2PSK (AES)

Certifications

Wifi, WPA2.0 (Personal)

Wifi Protected Setup(WPS)

Push Button Configuration (PBC), Personal
Identification Number (PIN)

You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following:
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

85

Wizard Setup through USB connection
Advanced Setup through

Ethernet connection
Operator Panel
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
WPS-PIN*1
WPS-PBC*2

*1

WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi® Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering
PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through
access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router
supports WPS.

*2

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing
the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the
access point supports WPS.

NOTE: For information on how to install a wireless, see "Using Wizard Setup to
Configure Wireless Settings" on page 86 or "Using Advanced Setup to Configure
Wireless Settings" on page 88.

Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Settings
1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your
computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.

86

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

2 Click Guided Setup.
3 Click Connect Your Printer.
Select your type of connection screen appears.
4 Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next.
The setting method selection window appears.
5 Ensure that Wizard is selected, and then click Next.

6 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

87

7 Confirm there are no errors displayed in the operator panel, and then click
NO.
If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.
8 Click Start installation.
9 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
10 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,
and then click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try
the following steps:
•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.

11 Select the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then
click Next.
12 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
The Congratulations! screen appears.
13 Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.

Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Settings
To use the Advanced Setup, display the Configuration Wireless Setting
screen.
Displaying Configure Wireless Settings Screen

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your
computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.

88

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

2 Click Guided Setup.
3 Click Connect Your Printer.
4 Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next.
The setting method selection window appears.
5 Select Advanced.

Select a connection method from the following

•

Ethernet Cable

•

WPS-PIN
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

89

•

WPS-PBC

•

Operator Panel

•

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Ethernet Cable

1 Select Ethernet Cable, and then click Next.
2 Follow the instructions, and then click Next.
The Advanced Configuration Tool screen appears.
3 Select the printer to be configured in the Select Printer screen, and then
click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be configured is not listed in the Select Printer screen,
try the following steps:
•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Enter IP Address, and then enter the IP address of your printer.

4 Enter the SSID.
5 Select Type of wireless network.
6 Configure the security setting, and then click Next.
The IP Address Settings screen appears.
7 Select IP Mode depending on your network scheme.
When IPv4 is selected:

Configure the following:
a

Select Type.

b

Enter the following items:
•

IP address of your printer

•

Subnet Mask

•

Gateway Address

When IPv6 is selected:

Configure the following:

90

a

Select Use Manual Address.

b

Enter IP address of your printer.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

c

Enter the gateway address of your network.

When Dual Stack is selected:
Configure the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings.
8 Click Next.
9 Ensure that the wireless settings are displayed, and then click Apply.
The Complete configuration screen appears.
10 Click Next.
11 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears, and then
click Next.
12 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click
NO on the Check Setup screen.
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.

13 Click Start Installation.
14 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
15 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,
and then click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try
the following steps:

•

Click Refresh to update the information.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

91

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer
manually.

16 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and
then click Next.
17 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
The Congratulations! screen appears.
18 Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
WPS-PIN

NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a
method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by
entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting, performed
through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless
router supports WPS.
1 Select WPS-PIN, and then click Next.
2 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
3 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click
NO on the Check Setup screen.
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.

92

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

4 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
5 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer, and then
click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer, try the
following steps:
•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.

6 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and
then click Next.
7 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
The Congratulations! screen appears.
8 Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
When the WPS-PIN operation is successful and the printer is rebooted,
wireless LAN connection is completed.
WPS-PBC

NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing
the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the
access point supports WPS.
1 Select WPS-PBC, and then click Next.
2 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
3 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click
NO on the Check Setup screen.
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

93

4 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
5 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,
and then click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try
the following steps:
•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.

6 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and
then click Next.
7 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
The Congratulations! screen appears.
8 Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
NOTE: For WPS-PBC operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the
manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.
When the WPS-PBC operation is successful and the printer is rebooted,
wireless LAN connection is completed.
Operator Panel

1 Select Operator Panel, and then click Next.
94

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

2 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
3 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click
NO on the Check Setup screen.
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.

4 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
5 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,
and then click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen,
try the following steps:

•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer
manually.

6 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and
then click Next.
7 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
The Congratulations! screen appears.
8 Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

95

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Select Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and then click Next.
2 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
3 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click
NO on the Check Setup screen.
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.

4 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
5 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,
and then click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try
the following steps:
•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.

6 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and
then click Next.
7 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
The Congratulations! screen appears.
8 Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
96

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool operation is successful and
the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection is completed.

Setting up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer
(When you need to setup your wireless connectivity with your
computer)
For DHCP network:

1 Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:
NOTE: You can also change the wireless settings using the wireless
application that may be installed in your computer.

For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a

Select Network Connections from Control Panel.

b

Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.

c

Select the Wireless Networks tab.

d

Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless
network settings is checked.
NOTE: Make note of the wireless settings on the Advanced window
(step f) and the Wireless Network Properties window (step g). You may
require these settings later.

e

Click the Advanced button.

f

Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
Advanced dialog box.

g

Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.

h

On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

97

i

Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top
of the list.

j

Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.

f

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

g

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008:

98

a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Sharing Center.

c

Select Connect to a network.

d

Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.

e

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

f

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available
network list, and click Connect.

2 Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the printer.
(Menu) button on the printer operator panel.

a

Press the

b

Press the
button until System is highlighted, and then press the
button.

c

Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.

d

Press the
button until Network is highlighted, and then press the
button.

e

Press the
button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the
button.

f

Press the
button.

button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the

(Default IP address range: 169.254.xxx.yyy)
IP Address
169.254.000.041
3 Ensure that the IP Address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

99

4 Enter the IP address in the address bar on your web browser.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool page appears.

5 Create wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
6 Reboot the printer.
7 Restore the wireless settings on your computer.
100

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless

configuration software, use it to change the wireless settings. See the
instructions below.

For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network Connections.

c

Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.

d

Select Wireless Network tab.

e

Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless
network settings is checked.

f

Click Advanced.

g

You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure
mode.

For Adhoc mode:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
dialog box.

For Infrastructure mode:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the
dialog box.
h

Click Add to display Wireless network properties.

i

Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.

j

Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.

k

Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select the network, and then click Connect.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

101

f

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

g

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Sharing Center.

c

Select Connect to a network.

d

Select the network, and then click Connect.

e

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

f

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select the network, and then click Connect.

f

Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.

For Fixed IP networks:

1 Set up your computer for wireless connectivity:
NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration
software, use it to change the wireless settings. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:

102

a

Select Network Connections from Control Panel.

b

Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.

c

Select the Wireless Networks tab.

d

Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless
network settings is checked.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

NOTE: Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step d
and step f so that you can restore them later.

e

Click the Advanced button.

f

Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
Advanced dialog box.

g

Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.

h

On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked

i

Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top
of the list.

j

Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

103

f

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

g

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Sharing Center.

c

Select Connect to a network.

d

Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.

e

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

f

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available
network list, and click Connect.

2 Check the IP address on your computer.

104

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

3 Set the IP address on the printer.
See "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.
4 Enter the IP address in the address bar on your web browser.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool page appears.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

105

5 Change the wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
6 Reboot the printer.
7 Restore the wireless settings on your computer.
NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless

configuration software, use it to change the wireless settings. Or you can
change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating
system. See the instructions below.

For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a

Select Network Connections from Control Panel.

b

Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.

c

Select Wireless Network tab.

d

Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless
network settings is checked.

e

Click Advanced.

f

You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure
mode.

For Adhoc mode:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
dialog box.

For Infrastructure mode:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the
dialog box.
g

Click Add to display Wireless network properties.

h

Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.

i

Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.

j

Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:

106

a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select the network, and then click Connect.

f

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

g

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Sharing Center.

c

Select Connect to a network.

d

Select the network, and then click Connect.

e

Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.

f

Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a

Open Control Panel.

b

Select Network and Internet.

c

Select Network and Sharing Center.

d

Select Connect to a network.

e

Select the network, and then click Connect.

f

Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.

Setting Up for Shared Printing
You can share your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities
CD that shipped with your printer, or using Windows Point and Print or peerto-peer method. However, if you use either of the Microsoft® methods you
will not get features such as the status monitor and other printer utilities,
which will get installed with the Drivers and Utilities CD.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

107

If you want to use the printer on a network, share the printer and install its
drivers on all the computers on the network.
NOTE: You need to purchase a Ethernet cable separately for shared printing.
For Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows
Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click Start  Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click this printer icon and select Properties.
3 From the Sharing tab, check the Share this printer check box, and then
type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network
clients using this printer.
5 Click OK.
If the files are not present in your computer, then you will be prompted to
insert the server operating system CD.
For Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Hardware and Sound  Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3 Click Change sharing options button.
4 The "Windows needs your permission to continue" appears.
5 Click Continue button.
6 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share
name text box.
7 Select Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network
clients using this printer.
8 Click OK.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3 Click Change Sharing Options button if exists.

108

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share
name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network
clients using this printer.
6 Click OK.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start  Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options button if exists, and
then click Yes.
4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share
name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network
clients using this printer.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Apply, and then click OK.
To check that the printer is shared:
•

Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes, or
Devices and Printers folder is shared. The share icon is shown under the
printer icon.

•

Browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server
and look for the shared name you assigned to the printer.

Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients
using the Point and Print method or the peer-to-peer method.

Point and Print
Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect
to a remote printer. This feature automatically downloads and installs the
printer driver.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

109

For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows
Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My
Network Places.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the
host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.

Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to
the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the
Printers and Faxes folder. The time taken to copy varies based on the
network traffic.
Close My Network Places.
4 Print a test page to verify installation.

110

a

Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition)  Settings (for Windows XP / Windows XP 64-bit Edition)
 Printers and Faxes.

b

Select the printer you have installed.

c

Click File  Properties.

d

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Network.
2 Locate and double-click the host name of the server computer.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Click Continue in User Account Control dialog box.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A
new printer object is added to the Printers folder. The duration of this
procedure may vary based on the network traffic.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click Start  Control Panel  Hardware and Sound.

b

Select Printers.

c

Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.

d

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Network.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the
host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A
new printer object will be added to the Printers folder. The time taken for
these activities varies based on network traffic.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click Start  Control Panel.

b

Select Printers.

c

Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

111

d

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start  Network (Start  Network for Windows Server 2008 R2).
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the
host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A
new printer object will be added to the Printers folder. The time taken for
these activities varies based on network traffic.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click Start  Devices and Printers.

b

Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.

c

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

Peer-to-Peer
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is installed on each
client computer. The client computers can modify the drivers and handle the
print jobs.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows
Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition)  Settings (for Windows XP / Windows XP 64-bit Edition)
Printers and Faxes.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Click Next.
4 Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and
then click Next. If the printer is not listed, type in the path of the printer
in the text box.
112

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

For example:\\\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it
to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
server installation process.
5 Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If
no system driver is available, specify the location where the driver is
available.
6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then
click Next.
If you want to verify installation, click Yes to print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Hardware and Sound  Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next.
If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The
printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the
Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

113

For example:\\\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it
on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
server installation process.
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If
no system driver is available, specify the location where the driver is
available.
5 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then
click Next.
6 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next.
If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The
printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the
Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.
For example: \\\

114

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it
on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
server installation process.
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If
no system driver is available, specify the location where the driver is
available.
5 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then
click Next.
6 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start  Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed,
select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't
listed. Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the
printer in the text box, and then click Next.
For example: \\\
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it
to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
server installation process.
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If
no system driver is available, you need to specify the path to the available
drivers.
5 Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.
6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then
click Next.
7 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
8 Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

115

116

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

10

Installing Printer Drivers on
Computers Running Macintosh
Installing the Drivers and Software
1 Run the Drivers and Utilities CD on the Macintosh computer.

2 Double-click the Dell 1355cnw Installer icon, and then click Continue.
3 Click Continue on the Introduction screen.
4 Confirm the installation location, and then click Continue.
5 Click Install to perform the standard installation.
6 Type the administrator's name and password, and then click OK.
7 Click Install to proceed with the installation.
8 Click Close to complete installation.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s)
When Using a USB connection

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax.
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default.
5 Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
6 Click Add.
When Using Bonjour

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

117

If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the
printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax.
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default.
5 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
6 Click Add.
When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the
printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax.
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click IP.
5 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
6 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
7 Select the model of your printer for Print Using.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is
displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.

8 Click Add.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11
When Using a USB Connection

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.

118

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4 Click Add.
5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer list.
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
7 Click Add.
When Using Bonjour

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the
printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.
3 Start the Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4 Click Add.
5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
7 Click Add.
When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the
printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

119

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4 Click Add.
5 Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
7 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
8 Select the model of your printer for Print Using.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is
displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.

9 Click Add.

120

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

Using Your Printer

121

122

11

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Overview
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.
One of the features of the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool is the EMail Alert Setup, which sends an e-mail to you or the key operator when the
printer needs supplies or intervention.

To fill up the printer inventory report, enter the asset tag of all the required
printers using the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the network
to display the asset tag number.

The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change
the printer settings and keep track of printing trends.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

123

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your
printer in your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings
page, or display the TCP/IP Settings page, which lists the IP address.
The Operator Panel

1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
The system settings page is printed.
5 Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Network on the system
settings page.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP
address automatically, and then print the system settings page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.
The Tool Box

NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, TCP/IP Settings cannot be
displayed.
NOTE:
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction Color
Printer Tool Box.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the

Select Printer window appears. In this case, click the name of this printer
listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Settings Report tab.

124

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign an IP address for your printer,
see "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:
Printer Status

Use the Printer Status menu to get feedback on the printer status. When a
toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen
to order an additional toner cartridge.
Printer Jobs

Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and
Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Settings

Use the Printer Settings menu to change printer settings and view the settings
in the operator panel remotely.
Print Server Settings

Using the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface
and necessary conditions for communications.
Print Volume

Use the Print Volume option to check the number of pages printed for each
paper size.
Address Book

Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, phone number,
server address, and fax number entries in the Address Book, or to register new
entries.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

125

Printer Information

Use the Printer Information menu to display the information of your printer.
Tray Settings

Use the Tray Settings menu to get information about the paper size and type
of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
E-Mail Alert

Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive an e-mail when the printer needs
supplies or intervention. Enter your name or the key operator name in the email list box to be notified. Set E-mail Alert also when using the Scan to Email feature.
Set Password

Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer
settings you selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Online Help

Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support web site.
Order Supplies at:
www.dell.com/supplies

Contact Dell Support at:
support.dell.com

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.
It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web
browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

126

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be unreadable if the
language differs from that of your web browser.

Setting Up From Web Browser
It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your
web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
For Internet Explorer® 6.0, Internet Explorer 7.0, Internet Explorer 8.0

Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Select Languages in the General tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
For example:
•

Italian (Italy) [it-IT]

•

Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]

•

German (Germany) [de-DE]

•

French (France) [fr-FR]

•

English (United States) [en-us]

•

Danish [da-DK]

•

Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]

•

Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]

•

Swedish [sv-SE]

Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) settings in the
Connections tab.
3 You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:
•

Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.

•

Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of your printer in the
Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under
Exceptions.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

127

After setting the language and proxy, enter
 (the IP address of your printer) in the
URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
For Firefox 2.0 or Later

Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Advanced.
3 When you use Firefox 2.0, click Choose in the General tab. When you use
Firefox 3.0, click Choose in the Content tab.
4 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in
order of preference list.
For example:
•

English [en] or English/United States [en-us]

•

Italian [it]

•

Spanish [es]

•

German [de]

•

French [fr]

•

Dutch [nl]

•

Norwegian [no]

•

Swedish [sv]

•

Danish [da]

Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Advanced tab.
3 Click Network on the Options dialog box.
4 Click Connection  Settings.
5 When you use Firefox 2.0, do one of the following:

128

•

Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box.

•

Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

•

Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter the IP
address of your printer in the No Proxy for edit box.

•

Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.

When you use Firefox 3.0, do one of the following:
•

Select the No Proxy check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.

•

Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.

•

Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter a
hostname and a port number if you have a list of one or more proxy
servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the
IP address of your printer in the No Proxy for edit box.

•

Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.

After setting the language and proxy, enter
 (the IP address of your printer) in the
URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.

Setting Up From Operator Panel
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to
Enable (the factory default) on the operator panel. Check the operator
panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For
more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359.

Page Display Format
The layout of the page is divided into three sections.

Top Frame
The top frame is located on the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of

the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.
The following items are displayed in the top frame.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

129

1

Dell 1355cnw
MFP

Displays the printer model name.

2

IP Address

Displays the IP address of your printer.

3

Location

Displays the location of the printer. The location can be
changed in the Basic Information on the Print Server
Settings page.

4

Contact Person Displays the administrator name of the printer. The name
can be changed in the Basic Information on the Print
Server Settings page.

5

Printer Bitmap Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status
menu appears in the right frame when you click the image.

Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all pages. The menu titles
displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You
can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.
The following menus are displayed in the left frame.
130

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1

Printer Status

Links to the Printer Status menu.

2

Printer Jobs

Links to the Printer Jobs menu.

3

Printer Settings

Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.

4

Print Server
Settings

Links to the Print Server Reports menu.

5

Print Volume

Links to the Print Volume menu
Links to the Address Book menu.

6

Address Book

7

Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu.

8

Tray Settings

Links to the Tray Settings menu.

9

E-Mail Alert

Links to the Print Server Settings menu.

10

Set Password

Links to the Other Features menu.

11

Online Help

Links to the Dell Support website.

12

Order Supplies at:

Links to the Dell web page.

13

Contact Dell
Support at:

Links to the Dell support page web address:
support.dell.com

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

131

Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all pages. The contents of the
right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. For
details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu
Items" on page 133.
Buttons in the Right Frame

1

Refresh button

2

Apply New Settings Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer
button
Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new
settings replace the old settings of the printer.

3

Restore Settings
button

132

Receives the current printer configuration and updates
the latest information in the right frame.

Restores the old settings. New settings will not be
submitted to the printer.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. When you access these menus, the authentication
window appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password of the
administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank
(NULL). You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the
Other Features menu. For more information, see "Set Password" on page 178.

Details of the Menu Items
"Printer Status"

"Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"

"Printer Jobs"

"Job List"
"Completed Jobs"

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

133

"Printer
Settings"

"Printer Settings "Menu Settings"
Report"
"Reports"
"Printer
Settings"

"System Settings"
"Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Color Balance"
"Copy Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"

"Printer
Maintenance"

"Paper Density"
"Adjust BTR"
"Adjust Fuser"
"Auto Registration Adjustment"
"Color Registration Adjustment"
"Clean Developer"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Reset Defaults"
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"

134

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

"Print Server
Settings"

"Print Server
Reports"

"Print Server Setup Page"

"Print Server
Settings"

"Basic Information"

"E-Mail Alert Setup Page"
"Port Settings"
"Wireless LAN (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction
Color Printer only)"*1
"TCP/IP"
"E-Mail Alert"
"SNMP"
"Scan to PC"

"Other
Features"
"Print Volume"
"Address Book"

"Set Password"
"Reset Print Server"
"Print Volume"

"Fax/E-mail"

"Address Book - Top Page"
"Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Address Book (Delete)"
"FAX Group - Top Page"
"FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"FAX Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Group - Top Page"
"E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"E-Mail Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Default Setup"

"Server Address" "Server Address - Top Page"
"Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Server Address (Delete)"
"Tray Settings"
*1

This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.

Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware,
and specifications of the printer.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

135

The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status
Purpose:

To check the status of the consumables and trays.
Values:

Cyan Cartridge Level

Displays the percentage of toner remaining in
each toner cartridge. When a cartridge is
empty, a message appears. The text Call or
Order is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies
website.

Magenta Cartridge Level
Yellow Cartridge Level
Black Cartridge Level
Paper Trays

Status

OK

Indicates that there is some paper in the tray
but the quantity is unknown.

Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.

Output Tray

Capacity

Displays the maximum capacity of the paper
tray.

Size

Displays the size of paper in the tray.

Status

OK

Capacity
Cover

Status

Indicates that the tray is available.
Displays the maximum capacity of the
output tray.

Closed

Indicates that the cover is closed.

Open

Indicates that the cover is open.

Printer Type

Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser
is displayed normally.

Printing Speed

Displays the printing speed.

Printer Events
Purpose:

When faults such as Out of Paper or Rear Cover is Open occur, the details of
all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the Printer Events page.
Values:

136

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Location

Displays the location where the error occurred.

Details

Displays the details of the error.

Printer Information
Purpose:

To display the system information of the printer. This page can also be
displayed by clicking Printer Information in the left frame.
Values:

Dell Service Tag Number

Displays Dell's service tag number.

Asset Tag Number

Displays the asset tag number of the printer.

Printer Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the printer.

Memory Capacity

Displays the memory capacity.

Processor Speed

Displays the processing speed.

Printer Revision Firmware
Levels
Version

Displays the version of the controller.

Network
Firmware
Version

Displays the NIC version.

Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed
Jobs pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol
or the print jobs.
Job List
Purpose:

To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to
update the screen.
Values:

ID

Displays the job ID.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

137

Job Name

Displays the file name of the job being printed.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Job Status

Displays the status of the job being printed.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted
Time

Displays the date when the print job was submitted.

Completed Jobs
Purpose:

To check the completed jobs. Up to 20 latest jobs are displayed. Click the
Refresh button to update the screen.
Values:

ID

Displays the job ID.

Job Name

Displays the file name of the job.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Output Result

Displays the status of the job.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Impression
Number

Displays the total number of pages used by the print job.

No. of Sheets

Displays the total number of sheets used by the print job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted
Time

Displays the date when the job was submitted.

Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to
configure the printer settings.
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.

138

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Printer Settings Report

The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings
Purpose:

To display the current settings of your printer.
Values:

System Settings Power Saver
Timer - Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer before it
enters the power saver timer - sleep after it
finishes a job.

Power Saver
Timer - Deep
Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer before it
enters the power saver timer - deep sleep after it
goes into the power saver timer mode 1.

Auto Reset

Displays the time taken by the printer before it
automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or
Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no
additional settings are made.

Control Panel
Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
when the operator panel input is correct. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.

Panel Alert
Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.

Job Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
when a job is complete. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.

Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.

Out of Paper
Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates
that the tone is disabled.

Auto Clear
Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5
seconds before the printer performs auto clear. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

139

All Tones

Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off
indicates that all the tones are disabled.

Job Time-Out

Displays the amount of time that the printer waits
for data to arrive from the computer.

Panel Language Displays the language used on the operator panel.
Auto Log
Print*1

Displays whether to automatically print a job
history report after every 20 jobs.

mm/inch

Displays the measurement unit used after the
numeric value on the operator panel.

Secure Settings Panel Lock Set Displays whether to limit access to Admin
Menu with a password.
Copy Service
Lock Set

Displays whether to enable the Copy service or to
require a password to use the service.

Scan Service
Lock Set

Displays whether to enable the Scan service or to
require a password to use the service.

Fax Service
Lock Set

Displays whether to enable the Fax service or to
require a password to use the service.

Print from USB Displays whether to enable the USB-Print service
or to require a password to use the service.
Secure Receive Displays whether to require a password to print
Set
incoming faxes.
Copy Defaults

Color

Displays whether to make copies in color or in
black and white.

Reduce/Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement
ratio.
Original Type

Displays the default document type.

Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default copy density level.

140

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of
the original to enhance text on the copy.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Copy Color
Balance

Copy Settings

Color Balance
(Red)

Displays the color balance level of red.

Color Balance
(Green)

Displays the color balance level of green.

Color Balance
(Blue)

Displays the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance

Displays the gray balance level.

Multiple-Up

Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up
feature.

Collated

Displays whether to sort the copy job.

Margin
Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin
Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

141

Scan Defaults

Scan To
Network

Displays whether to store scanned image on a
network server or on a computer.

File Format

Displays the file format to save the scanned image.

Color

Displays whether to scan in color or in black and
white.

Resolution

Displays the default scan resolution.

Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default scan density level.
Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of
the original to enhance text on the scanned image.

Margin
Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin
Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.

Fax Defaults

Image
Compression

Displays the image compression level.

Max E-Mail
Size

Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be
sent.

Resolution

Displays the resolution level to be used for fax
transmission.

Lighter/Darker Displays the default density level to be used for
fax transmission.
Fax Settings

142

Delayed Start

Displays the fax transmission start time.

Receive Mode

Displays the fax receiving mode.

Auto Receive
Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into
the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming
call.

Auto Receive
Tel/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into
the fax receive mode after the external telephone
receives an incoming call.

Auto Receive
Answer/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into
the fax receive mode after the external answering
machine receives an incoming call.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Line Monitor

Displays the volume of the line monitor, which
audibly monitors a transmission through the
internal speaker until a connection is made.

Ring Tone
Volume

Displays the volume of the ring tone, which
indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call
through the internal speaker when Receive Mode
is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Displays the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Displays the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Displays the interval between transmission
attempts.

Redial
Attempts

Displays the number of redial attempts.

Redial Delay

Displays the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from
unwanted numbers.
Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a
remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Displays the remote receive code to start Remote
Tone
Receive.
Fax Header

Displays whether to print the information of
sender on the header of faxes.

Fax Header
Name

Displays the name of sender to be printed on the
header of faxes.

Fax Number

Displays the fax number to be printed on the
header of faxes.

Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern

Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) setting.

Sent Fax
Forward

Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a
specified destination.

Fax Forward
Number

Displays the fax number of the destination to
which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

143

Paper Density

144

Prefix Dial
Number

Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials
before any auto dial number is started.

Discard Size

Displays whether to discard text or images at the
bottom of a fax page when the entire page does
not fit onto the output paper.

ECM

Displays whether to enable the Error Correction
Mode (ECM).

Modem Speed

Displays the fax modem speed.

Fax Activity

Displays whether to automatically print a fax
activity report after every 50 incoming and
outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

Displays whether to print a transmission report
after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Displays whether to print a transmission report
after every fax transmission to multiple
destinations or only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol

Displays whether to print a protocol monitor
report after every fax transmission or only when an
error occurs.

Country

Displays the country where the printer is used.

Plain

Displays the paper density of plain paper.

Label

Displays the paper density of labels.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Adjust BTR

Adjust Fuser

Plain

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for plain paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for thick plain paper.

Covers

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for cover paper.

Label

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for labels.

Coated

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for coated paper.

Recycled

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for recycled paper.

Envelope

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for envelopes.

Plain

Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
plain paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
thick plain paper.

Covers

Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
cover paper.

Label

Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
labels.

Coated

Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
coated paper.

Recycled

Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
recycled paper.

Envelope

Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
envelopes.

Auto Registration Adjustment

Displays whether to automatically adjust color
registration.

Adjust Altitude

Displays the altitude of the location where the
printer is installed.

Non-Dell Toner

Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another
manufacturer.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

145

Clock Settings

Date Format

Displays the default date format.

Time Format

Displays the default time format; 24H or 12 Hour
Clock.

Time Zone

Displays the default time zone.

Set Date

Displays the date setting.

Set Time

Displays the time setting.

Web Link
Select Reorder
Customization URL

Tray Settings

Displays a link used for ordering consumables,
which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in
the left frame.

Regular

Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be
linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Premier

Displays the premier web address
(http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Tray 1 Paper
Type

Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.

Tray 1 Paper
Size

Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.

Tray 1 Custom
Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in
the MPF.

Tray 1 Custom
Size - X

Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in
the MPF.

Display Popup Displays whether to use a popup menu that
prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
*1 If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.

Reports
Purpose:

To print the settings and history information of your printer.
Values:

System Settings Click the Start button to print the system settings page.

146

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Panel Settings

Click the Start button to print the panel settings page.

Job History

Click the Start button to print the Job History report.

Error History

Click the Start button to print the Error History report.

Address Book

Click the Start button to print the Address Book report.

Demo Page

Click the Start button to print the Demo Page.

Printer Settings

The Printer Settings tab contains the System Settings, Secure Settings, Copy
Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy Settings, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, and Fax
Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:

To configure the basic printer settings.
Values:

Power Saver
Timer - Sleep*1

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
saver timer mode 1 after it finishes a job.

Power Saver
Timer - Deep
Sleep

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
saver timer mode 2 after it goes into the power saver timer mode 1.

Auto Reset

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically
resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax on the operator panel to
the defaults when no additional settings are made.

Control Panel
Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is correct, or disables the tone.

Panel Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is incorrect, or disables the tone.
Job Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is complete,
or disables the tone.

Alert Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs,
or disables the tone.

Out of Paper
Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs
out of paper, or disables the tone.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

147

Auto Clear Alert Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the
Tone
printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.
All Tones

Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.

Job Time-Out

Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to
arrive from the computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.

Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel.
Auto Log Print*2 Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
mm/inch*3

Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value
on the operator panel.

*1 Enter 5 in Power Saver Timer - Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode
five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warm-up
time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room
lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this
keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value
between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance
between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer
mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the
standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
*2 If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.
*3 The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Purpose:

To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the
password.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When you change
the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the
left frame and set the password.
Values:

Panel Lock Set Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.
New Password

Sets a password that is required to access Admin Menu.

Re-enter
Password

Enter the new password again to confirm.

148

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Function Enabled
Purpose:

To enable the services to be password-enabled, and allow the user to change
it.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to limit the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print
services. When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, click Set Password you change on the left frame and set the password.
Values:

Copy Service
Lock Set

Enables you to set a password for the Copy Service feature.

Scan Service
Lock Set

Enables you to set a password for the Scan Service feature.

Fax Service
Lock Set

Enables you to set a password for the Fax Service feature.

Print from USB Enables you to set a password for the USB-Print Service feature.
New Password

Sets a password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print
services.

Re-enter
Password

Enter the new password again to confirm.

Secure Receive
Purpose:

Enables you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes. When the Secure
Receive feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them
when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock printing incoming fax. When changing
the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the
left frame and set the password.
Values:

Secure Receive Enables you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes.
Set
New Password

Sets a password that is required to print incoming faxes.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

149

Re-enter
Password

Enter the new password again to confirm.

Copy Defaults
Purpose:

To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:

Color

Selects mode for color or black and white copying.

Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Custom
Sets a custom reduction/enlargement ratio within the range of 25%
Reduce/Enlarge to 400% when Reduce/Enlarge is set to Custom.
Original Type

Sets the copy image quality.

Document Size Sets the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default copy density level.
Sharpness

Sets the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance
text on the copy.

Copy Color Balance
Purpose:

To specify the default color balance level.
Values:

Color Balance (Red)

Sets the color balance level of red.

Color Balance (Green) Sets the color balance level of green.
Color Balance (Blue)

Sets the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance

Sets the gray balance level.

Copy Settings
Purpose:

To configure the Copy settings.

150

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Multiple-Up

Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit
onto one sheet of paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in
the original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in
the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

Collated

Sets whether to sort the copy job.

Margin
Top/Bottom

Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin
Left/Right

Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50
mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Scan Defaults
Purpose:

To create your own default Scan settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Scan To
Network

Computer
(Network)*

Stores the scanned image on a computer using the
Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.

Server (FTP)

Stores the scanned image on a server using the
FTP protocol.

File Format

Sets the file format to save the scanned image.

Color

Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution

Sets the default scan resolution.

Document Size Sets the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default scan density level.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

151

Sharpness

Sets the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance
text on the scanned image.

Margin
Top/Bottom

Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin
Left/Right

Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50
mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Image
Compression

Sets the image compression level.

Max E-Mail
Size

Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range
of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default is 2048 K bytes.

Fax Defaults
Purpose:

To create your own default Fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Resolution

Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized
characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small
characters or thin lines or documents printed
using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine
detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the super fine
resolution.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic
images.

Lighter/Darker Sets the default density level to be used for fax transmission.
Delayed Start

152

Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a
specified time.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Fax Settings
Purpose:

To configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Receive Mode

Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can
receive a fax by picking up the handset of the
external telephone, pressing the remote receive code,
and then pressing .
Fax*

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/ When the printer receives an incoming fax, the
Fax
external telephone rings for the time specified in
Auto Receive Fax/Tel, and then the printer
automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not
a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker
indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Answer
Machine/
Fax

The printer can share a telephone line with an
answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there
are fax tones. If the phone communication is using
serial transmission in your country (such as Germany,
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France
and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.

DRPD

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone
company. After the telephone company has provided
a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
specific ring pattern.

Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Receive
Tel/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

153

Auto Receive
Answer/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming
call.

Line Monitor

Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.

Ring Tone
Volume

Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an
incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker
when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Sets the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Sets the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the
destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not
redial.
Redial Delay

Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup

Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone
Book.

Remote Receive

Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on
the external telephone.

Remote Receive
Tone

Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote
Receive.

Fax Header

Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of
faxes.

Fax Header
Name

Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up
to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Fax Number

Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of
faxes.

Fax Cover Page

Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a
service provided by some telephone companies.

Sent Fax Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Forward
Number

154

Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming
faxes will be forwarded.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Prefix Dial

Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial
Number

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials
before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the
Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size

Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto
the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the
bottom of the page.

ECM

Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote
machines must also support the ECM.

Modem Speed

Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or
reception error occurs.

Fax Activity

Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every
50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error
occurs.

Fax Protocol

Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.

Country

Sets the country where the printer is used.

Printer Maintenance

The Printer Maintenance tab contains the Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust
Fuser, Auto Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustment, Clean
Developer, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, Clock Settings, and
Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Purpose:

To specify the paper density.
Values:

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

155

Plain

Sets the paper density of plain paper.

Label

Sets the paper density of labels.

Adjust BTR
Purpose:

To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller
(BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive
values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you
see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white
spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:

Plain

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain
paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Thick

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick
plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Covers

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover
paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Label

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels
within the range of -3 to 3.

Coated

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated
paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Recycled

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled
paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Envelope

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for
envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.

Adjust Fuser
Purpose:

To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To
lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.
156

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When
the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:

Plain

Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for plain paper within
the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Thick

Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick plain paper
within the range of -3 to 3.

Covers

Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for cover paper within
the range of -3 to 3.

Label

Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for labels within the
range of -3 to 3.

Coated

Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for coated paper within
the range of -3 to 3.

Recycled

Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for recycled paper within
the range of -3 to 3.

Envelope

Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for envelopes within the
range of -3 to 3.

Auto Registration Adjustment
Purpose:

To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Color Registration Adjustment
Purpose:

To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the
printer or when the printer is moved to a different location.
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto
Registration Adjustment is set to Off.
Clean Developer
Purpose:
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

157

To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge, to use
up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to
stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Values:

Clean
Developer

Click Start to stir the toner in the toner cartridge.

Yellow Toner
Refresh

Click Start to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

Magenta Toner Click Start to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
Refresh
Cyan Toner
Refresh

Click Start to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

Black Toner
Refresh

Click Start to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.

Adjust Altitude
Purpose:

To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with
barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of
the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality,
incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Values:

0 meter*

Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

1000 meters
2000 meters
3000 meters

Reset Defaults
Purpose:

158

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) memory for system parameters,
Address Book data for fax, or Address Book data for e-mail. After executing
this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset
to their default values.
Values:

Reset Defaults
and Restart
Printer

Click Start to initialize the system parameters.

Reset Defaults
of User (Fax)
Section

Click Start to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.

Reset Defaults
of User (Scan)
Section

Click Start to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the
Address Book.

Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:

To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features
unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer. Dell
recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not
provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or
components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart
the printer.
Clock Settings
Purpose:

To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

159

Date Format*1

yy/mm/dd

Specifies the date format.

mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
Time Format

12 Hour
Clock*

Specifies the time format.

24H
Time Zone

Specifies the time zone.

Set Date

Specifies the current date.

Set Time

Specifies the current time.

*1

The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Web Link Customization
Purpose:

To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Values:

Select Reorder
URL

Select the Regular or Premier web address to be linked to Order
Supplies at: in the left frame.

Regular

Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order
Supplies at: in the left frame.

Premier

Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that
can be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and
necessary conditions for communications.
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.

160

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Print Server Reports

The Print Server Reports tab contains the Print Server Setup Page and E-Mail
Alert Setup Page.
Print Server Setup Page
Purpose:

To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports. On this page, you can only
verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages
in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
Ethernet*1

Ethernet
Settings

Displays the current settings of Ethernet
transmission rate and the duplex settings.

Current
Ethernet
Settings

Displays the current Ethernet settings.

MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address
of the printer.
Wireless*2

SSID

Displays the name that identifies the network.

Network Type Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or
Infrastructure mode.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer
setting.
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the connection.
Link Quality Displays the quality of the connection.
Encryption

Displays the security method.

Transmit Key Displays the transmit key.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

161

TCP/IP
Settings

Host Name

Displays the host name.

IP Mode

Displays the IP mode.

IPv4

IP Address
Mode

Displays the IP address mode.

IP Address

Displays the IP address.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Gateway
Address

Displays the gateway address.

Use Manual
Address

Displays the manual IP address.

Manual
Address

Displays the IP address.

Stateless
Address 1-3

Displays the stateless addresses.

Link Local
Address

Displays the link local address.

Manual
Gateway
Address

Displays the gateway address.

IPv6

Auto Configure Displays the gateway address.
Gateway
Address
DNS

IPv4

Get DNS
Displays if the printer receives the
Server Address DNS server address automatically
from DHCP
from the DHCP server.
Manual DNS Displays the DNS server address.
Server Address

IPv6

Get DNS
Displays if the printer receives the
Server Address DNS server address automatically
from DHCPv6- from the DHCPv6-lite server.
lite
Manual DNS Displays the DNS server address.
Server Address

162

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

LPD

Port Settings Displays the port status.
Connection
Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Bonjour
(mDNS)

Port Settings Displays the port status.

Port9100

Port Settings Displays the port status.
Port Number Displays the port number.
Connection
Time-Out

HTTP

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Settings Displays the port status.
Port Number Displays the port number.
Simultaneous Displays the number of connections received
Connections simultaneously by the client.
Connection
Time-Out

WSD

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Settings Displays the WSD (Web Services on Devices) port
status.
Port Number Displays the WSD port number.
Receive
Time-Out

Displays the receive time-out period.

Notification
Time-Out

Displays the notification time-out period.

Maximum
Number of
TTL

Displays the maximum number of TTLs.

Maximum
Number of
Notification

Displays the maximum number of notifications.

SNMP

Port Settings Displays the port status.

LLTD

Port Settings Displays the port status.

FTP Client

Connection
Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

FTP Passive

Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

163

SMB Client

Connection
Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

*1

This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wired network.

*2

This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.

E-Mail Alert Setup Page
Purpose:

To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the e-mail feature and E-Mail Alerts
feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to
change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:

E-Mail Server
Settings

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Primary SMTP Displays the primary SMTP gateway.
Gateway
SMTP Port
Number

Displays the SMTP port number.

E-Mail Send
Displays the authentication method for outgoing
Authentication e-mail.

164

POP3 Server
Address

Displays the POP3 server address.

POP3 Port
Number

Displays the POP3 port number.

Reply Address

Displays the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-mail Alert.

SMTP Server
Connection

Displays the status of the SMTP server
connection.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

E-Mail Alert
Settings

E-Mail List 1

Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the
E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 1.

Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts
List 1

E-Mail List 2

Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for consumables.

Paper Handling
Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for paper
handling.

Service Call

Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for service calls.

Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the
E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 2.

Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts
List 2

Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for consumables.

Paper Handling
Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for paper
handling.

Service Call

Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for service calls.

Print Server Settings

The Print Server Settings tab contains the Basic Information, Port Status, Wireless
LAN, TCP/IP, E-Mail Alert, SNMP, and Scan To PC pages.
Basic Information
Purpose:

To configure the basic information of the printer.
Values:

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

165

System Settings Printer Name
Location

Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63
alphanumeric characters.

Contact Person Specifies the contact name, number, and other
information of the administrator and service
center using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Administrator Specifies the contact address of the administrator
E-Mail Address and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.

EWS Settings

Asset Tag
Number

Enter the asset tag number for the printer.

Auto Refresh

Automatically refreshes the contents of the status
display pages.

Auto Refresh
Interval

Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents
of the status display pages automatically from 15
to 600 seconds.

NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame,
Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed Jobs page.
Port Settings
Purpose:

To enable or disable printing connectors and management protocol features.
Values:

166

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Ethernet*1

Ethernet
Settings

Auto*

Detects Ethernet transmission
rate and the duplex settings
automatically.

10Base-T HalfDuplex

Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex
as the default value.

10Base-T FullDuplex

Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex
as the default value.

100Base-TX
Half-Duplex

Selects 100Base-TX HalfDuplex as the default value.

100Base-TX Full- Selects 100Base-TX FullDuplex
Duplex as the default value.

Port Status

Current Ethernet Settings

Displays the current settings of
Ethernet.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of
the printer.

LPD

Specifies whether to enable LPD.

Port9100

Specifies whether to enable Port9100.

E-Mail Alert

Specifies whether to enable the E-Mail Alert
feature.

SNMP

Specifies whether to enable the SNMP.

WSD

Specifies whether to enable the WSD port.

Bonjour
(mDNS)

Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour(mDNS)
feature.

Status Messager Specifies whether to enable the Status Messager.
LLTD
*1

Specifies whether to enable LLTD.

This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.

NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is
rebooted. When you change or configure the settings, click the Apply New Settings
button to apply the new settings.
Wireless LAN (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)
Purpose:

To configure wireless network settings.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

167

To connect the printer with a wireless network, be sure to disconnect the
cable.
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.
Values:

Wireless
Settings

168

SSID

Specifies the name that identifies the wireless
network using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

Network Type

Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or
Infrastructure.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of the wireless network
setting of the printer.

Link Channel

Displays the channel number of the wireless
connection of the printer.

Link Quality

Displays the quality of the wireless network
connection of the printer.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Security
Settings

Encryption

Select the security method from the list.
No Security*

Specifies No Security to
configure the wireless setting
without specifying a security
method from WEP, WPAPSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES,
and WPA-PSK TKIP.

WEP 64 Bit
ASCII (5 Bytes)

Specifies the WEP 64 Bit
ASCII to use through the
wireless network.

WEP 128 Bit
ASCII (13 Bytes)

Specifies the WEP 128 Bit
ASCII to use through the
wireless network.

WEP 64 Bit Hex
(10 Bytes)

Specifies the WEP 64 Bit Hex
to use through the wireless
network.

WEP 128 Bit Hex Specifies the WEP 128 Bit
(26 Bytes)
Hex to use through the
wireless network.
WPA-PSK AES*1

Specifies the WPA-PSK AES
to use through the wireless
network.

WPA2-PSK AES*1 Specifies the WPA2-PSK AES
to use through the wireless
network.
WPA-PSK TKIP

Specifies the WPA-PSK TKIP
to use through the wireless
network.

WEP Key 1

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from
Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 1

Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm.

WEP Key 2

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from
Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 2

Enter the WEP key 2 again to confirm.

WEP Key 3

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from
Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 3

Enter the WEP key 3 again to confirm.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

169

WEP Key 4

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from
Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 4

Enter the WEP key 4 again to confirm.

Transmit Key

Specifies the transmit key type from the list.

Pass Phrase

Specifies the pass phrase.

Re-enter Pass Phrase

Enter the pass phrase again to confirm.

*1

This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network
Type.

NOTE: This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless
network.
TCP/IP
Purpose:

To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Values:

170

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

TCP/IP
Settings

Host Name

Specifies the host name.

IP Mode

Specifies the IP mode.

IPv4

IP Address Mode Selects the IP address mode.
Manual IP
Address

Manually sets the IP address.

Manual Subnet
Mask

Manually sets the subnet
mask.

Manual Gateway Manually sets the gateway
Address
address.
IPv6

Use Manual
Address

To set the IP address
manually.

Manual Address

Manually sets the IP address.
To specify an IPv6 address,
enter the address followed by
a slash (/) and then "64". For
details, consult your system
administrator.

Stateless Address
1-3

Displays the stateless
addresses.

Link Local
Address

Displays the link local address.

Manual Gateway Manually sets the gateway
Address
address.
Auto Configure
Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

171

DNS

DNS Domain
Name

Specifies the domain name of the domain name
server. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters,
periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to
specify more than one domain name, separate
them using a comma or semicolon.

IPv4

Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCP

Specifies whether to get the
DNS server address
automatically from the
DHCP server.

Manual DNS
Server Address

Sets the DNS server address.

Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCPv6-lite

Specifies whether to get the
DNS server address
automatically from the
DHCPv6-lite server.

Manual DNS
Server Address

Sets the DNS server address.

IPv6

LPD
Port9100

HTTP

172

Connection
Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to
1000 seconds.

Port Number

Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.

Connection
Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period between 1
and 1000 seconds.

Port Number

Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between
8000 and 9999.

Simultaneous
Connections

Displays the maximum number of connections
received simultaneously by the client.

Connection
Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255
seconds.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

WSD

Port Number

Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between
8000 and 9999.

Receive
Time-Out

Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65535
seconds.

Notification
Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60
Delivery Time- seconds.
Out
Maximum
Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Number of TTL
Maximum
Number of
Notification

Sets the maximum number of notifications from
10 to 20.

E-Mail Alert
Purpose:

To configure settings for E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by
clicking E-Mail Alert in the left frame.
Values:

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

173

E-Mail Server
Settings

Primary SMTP Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
Gateway
SMTP Port
Number

Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be
25, 587 or between 5000 and 65535.

E-Mail Send
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing
Authentication e-mail.
SMTP Login
User

Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63
alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.

SMTP Login
Password

Specifies the SMTP account password using up to
31 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter SMTP Enter the SMTP account password again to
Login Password confirm.

174

POP3 Server
Address

Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address
format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host
name using up to 63 characters.

POP3 Port
Number

Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must
be 110 or between 5000 and 65535.

POP User
Name

Specifies the POP3 account user name. Up to 63
alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.

POP User
Password

Specifies the POP3 account password using up to
31 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter POP
User Password

Enter the password again to confirm.

Reply Address

Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-mail Alert.

SMTP Server
Connection

Displays the status of the SMTP server
connection.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

E-Mail Alert
Settings

E-Mail List 1

Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.

Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts
List 1

E-Mail List 2

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for consumables.

Paper Handling
Alerts

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for paper handling.

Service Call

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for service calls.

Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.

Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts
List 2

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for consumables.

Paper Handling
Alerts

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for paper handling.

Service Call

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for service calls.

SNMP
Purpose:

To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Values:

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

175

Community
Name

Community
Name
(Read only)

Specifies the community name to access (read
only) data using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is
entered. Characters entered for community name
in the previous settings will not be displayed on
the screen. The default Read Community is
public.

Re-enter
Enter the community name to access (read only)
Community
data again to confirm.
Name (Read only)

176

Community
Name
(Read/Write)

Specifies the community name to access (read
and write) data using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is
entered. Characters entered for community name
in the previous settings will not be displayed on
the screen. The default Read/Write Community
is private.

Re-enter
Community
Name
(Read/Write)

Enter the community name to access (read and
write) data again to confirm.

Community
Name (Trap)

Specifies the community name used for trap up
to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original settings will remain valid if nothing
is entered. Characters entered for community
name in the previous settings will not be
displayed on the screen. The default Trap
Community is " " (NULL).

Re-enter
Community
Name (Trap)

Enter the community name used for trap again to
confirm.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Trap
Notification
1-4

Trap Address Type Select the trap address type from the list.
Selecting Off clears the settings in Trap Address,
Port Number, and Notify, and does not notify
trap occurrence. Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 allows
you to enter Trap Address.
Trap Address

Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
following format:
• IPv4
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each
section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0
and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are
not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and
65535.
• IPv6
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmm
mm format. Each section of "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff.
IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0
and 65535.

Trap Notification Enter the SNMP trap destination port number.
(IP) Port Number
Notify
Authenticate Error Trap

Specifies whether to notify trap occurrence.
Specifies whether to notify Authenticate Error
Trap.

Scan to PC
Purpose:

To specify the client when scanning data.
Values:

FTP Client

Connection
Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60
seconds.

FTP Passive

Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

177

SMB Client

Connection
Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60
seconds.

Other Features

The Other Features tab contains the Set Password and Reset Print Server pages.
Set Password
Purpose:

To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters
of the printer from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.
Values:

Administrator
Password

Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The
password will appear as asterisks (*) in the field when it is entered.

Re-enter
Administrator
Password

Enter the password again to confirm.

NOTE: If you forgot your password, initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) to restore
the password to the default (NULL). See "Reset Print Server" on page 178.
NOTE: When you change the password to lock the operator panel, set the
password from Panel Lock Set in the Printer Settings.
Reset Print Server
Purpose:

To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for the network feature and reboot
the printer. You can also initialize the NVM of the printer from Reset
Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Values:

Initialize NIC
NVRAM
Memory and
restart printer.

178

Click the Start button to initialize NVM. Network settings will
revert to the factory default settings and reboot the network
capability.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Restart Printer

Click the Start button to reboot the printer.

Print Volume
Use the Print Volume menu to verify the number of printed pages.
Values:

Printer Page
Count

Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was
shipped from the factory.

Paper Used

Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.

Address Book
The Address Book menu contains the Fax/E-mail and Server Address pages.
Fax/E-mail

The Fax/E-mail page contains the following subpages.
Address Book

Allows you to view, edit, or create address book entries.

Fax Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.

E-Mail Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.

E-Mail Default Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and
Setup
message.

Address Book - Top Page
Purpose:

To view the address book entries registered on the Address book page.
Values:

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user
IDs indicated on the button.
ID:Name

Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that
user ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name
column.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

179

Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.
E-Mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.

Confirm/Chan Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected
ge
user ID.
Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected user ID.

Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the address book entries on the Address Book page, or create a
new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Address Book top page.
Values:

ID (Fax Speed
Dial)

Displays the selected user ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the
user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.

Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the phone number of the user, or enter a
phone number for the new entry.
E-mail Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an
e-mail address for the new entry.
Delete

Click this button to delete the entry for the user ID. This button is
available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Address Book (Delete)
Purpose:

180

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

To delete the address book entries registered on the Address Book page. The
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete
button on the Address Book top page.
Values:

ID (Fax Speed
Dial)

Displays the selected user ID.

Name

Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected
user ID.

Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.
E-mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

FAX Group - Top Page
Purpose:

To view the fax group entries registered on the Fax Group page.
Values:

GroupID:Name Displays a fax group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without
an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm /
Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
group ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected group ID.

FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the fax number group entries on the Fax Group page, or create
a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Fax Group top page.
Values:
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

181

Fax Group

FAX Speed
Dial

ID

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for
the group ID, or enter a new group name.

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for
the group of speed dial codes indicated on the
button.
ID:Name

Displays a speed dial code and the names of an
entry registered under the speed dial code. Speed
dial codes without an entry show (Not in Use) in
the Name column.

Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an
entry registered under the selected speed dial
code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

FAX Group (Delete)
Purpose:

To delete the fax number group entries registered on the Fax Group page. The
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete
button on the Fax Group top page.
Values:

ID

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

E-Mail Group - Top Page
Purpose:

182

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.
Values:

GroupID:Name Displays a group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an
entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm/
Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
group ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected group ID.

E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or
create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears
when you click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the E-Mail Group top
page.
Values:

E-Mail Group

ID

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for
the group ID, or enter a new group name.

E-Mail Address Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for
the group of IDs indicated on the button.
ID:Name

Displays a user ID and the name of the user
registered under that user ID. IDs without an
entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.

Address

Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an
entry registered under the selected user ID, or
enter an e-mail address for the new entry.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

183

E-Mail Group (Delete)
Purpose:

To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete
button on the E-mail Group top page.
Values:

ID

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

E-Mail Default Setup
Purpose:

To set the default e-mail subject and message.
Values:

Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject. Up to 50
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Body Text

Allows you to enter the default e-mail message. Up to 200
alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Server Address

Server Address - Top Page
Purpose:

To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.
Values:

184

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.
ID:Name

Displays a server ID and the name of a file directory registered
under that server ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in
the Name column.

Server Address

Displays the address of the file directory.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.

Confirm/
Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
server ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected server ID.

Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create
a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Server Address top page.
Values:

ID

Displays the selected server ID.

Name

Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server
ID, or enter a new server name.

Server Type

FTP

Select this to store scanned documents on a server
via the FTP protocol.

SMB

Select this to store scanned documents on a
computer via the Server Message Block (SMB)
protocol.

Server Address

Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the
server ID, or enter a new server address.

Share Name

Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new
shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB.

Server Path

Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new
path.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

185

Server Port
Number

Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter
a new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port
number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.

Login Name

Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access
the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.

Login Password Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the
selected protocol, or enter a new password.
Re-enter
Password

Enter the password again to confirm.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Server Address (Delete)
Purpose:

To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete
button on the Server Address top page.
Values:

ID

Displays the selected server ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the server ID.

Server Address

Displays the server address registered under the server ID.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in
the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Values:

186

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Tray Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
Tray Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
Tray 1 Custom
Size - Y

Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

Tray 1 Custom
Size - X

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

Display Popup

Sets whether to display a popup menu that prompts the user to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Apply New
Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

187

188

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Print Media Guidelines

12

Print media can be paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others.
Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media.
Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing
troubles. This section describes selecting print media, caring for print media,
and loading the print media in Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) or Priority Sheet
Inserter (PSI).

Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long
paper. For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb)
xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print
media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper
package, and load the paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 59 and "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 66 for detailed loading instructions.

Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is
recommended that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper
stock.
Weight

Both MPF and PSI automatically feed paper whose weights range from 60 to
163 g/m2 (16 to 44 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) may
not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75
g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.
Curl

Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can
cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes
through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
Print Media Guidelines

189

unwrapped, even in the feeder, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and cause feeding problems regardless of humidity. When printing
on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF or PSI.
Smoothness

The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is
too rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor
print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.
Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print
quality.
Moisture Content

The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability
of the printer to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original
packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper
to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is
either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the
width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long
fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb bond), grain
short is preferred.
Fiber Content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped
wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess characteristics that can
result in degraded paper handling.

Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use dry 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
xerographic paper. Business paper designed for general business use also
provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high
temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions.
The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the
manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is
acceptable for laser printers.
190

Print Media Guidelines

NOTE: Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of
print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber
content, and color.

Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•

Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also
known as carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon
required (NCR) paper

•

Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

•

Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fuser

•

Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on
the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such as optical character recognition
(OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to
successfully print on these forms.

•

Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper

•

Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper

•

Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do
not meet DIN 19 309

•

Multiple-part forms or documents

•

Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the
text) when printing on talc or acid paper.

•

Moist paper that may cause wrinkle

Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
•

Always use new, dry, and undamaged paper.

•

Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the
paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.

•

Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

Print Media Guidelines

191

•

Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This
may result in a paper jam.

•

Do not remove the PSI while a job is printing.

•

Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the MPF or PSI.

•

Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the
stack on a level surface.

Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead
When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer:
•

Use grain long paper for best results.

•

Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or
engraved printing process.

•

Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.

•

Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

•

Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic
copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the
fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these
requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper
supplier.

Printing on Letterhead
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed
letterhead you have selected is acceptable for laser printers.

192

Print Media Guidelines

Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following
table for help when loading letterhead in the print media sources.

Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that
the title on the letter head enters the printer first.
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes
and in manufacturing techniques. However, it may not be possible to print on
the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.
To select and use pre-punched paper:
•

Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large
quantities of pre-punched paper.

•

Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into
paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when
multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.

•

Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your
printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be
as good as standard paper.

•

Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched
paper.

Print Media Guidelines

193

Envelopes
Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels
of light wrinkling. Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is
recommended that you try a sample first. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 59 or "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 66 for instructions on loading an
envelope.
When printing on envelopes:

194

•

Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.

•

Set the print media source to MPF or PSI. Set the paper type to Envelope,
and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver.

•

For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
paper. You can use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond) weight for the envelope
feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with 100%
cotton content must not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.

•

Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.

•

Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without
sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If
you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with
the envelope supplier.

•

Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.

•

To load envelope in MPF or PSI, the print side must be facing up.

•

See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on
page 59 or "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on
page 66 for instructions on loading an envelope.

•

Use one envelope size during a print job.

•

Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%)
and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes.

•

For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
–

Have excessive curl or twist

–

Are stuck together or damaged in any way

–

Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing

Print Media Guidelines

–

Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars

–

Have an interlocking design

–

Have postage stamps attached

–

Have nicked edges or bent corners

–

Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.
When selecting labels:
•

Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to
withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per
square inch (psi).

•

Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
NOTICE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that
you try a sample first.

When printing on labels:
•

Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without
sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.

•

Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray.

•

Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.

•

Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the
perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.

•

Do not print a label through the printer more than once.

•

Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.

•

Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.

•

Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during
printing, resulting in a jam.

Print Media Guidelines

195

•

Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is
recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm
(0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your
printer and could void your warranty.
CAUTION: Otherwise the printer occur in a jam and contaminate your printer and
your cartridges with adhesive. As a result, could void your printer and cartridge
warranties.

Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media
feeding problems and uneven print quality.
•

For best results, store print media in an environment where the
temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is
40%.

•

Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the
floor.

•

If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton,
ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or
curl.

•

Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Identifying Print Media and Specifications
This section provides information on supported paper sizes, types, and
specification.

Supported Paper Sizes
Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)

Priority Sheet Inserter
(PSI)

A4 (210x297 mm)

Y

Y

B5 (182x257 mm)

Y

Y

A5 (148x210 mm)

Y

Y

C5 (162x229 mm)

Y

Y

196

Print Media Guidelines

Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)
Monarch (3.875x7.5 in)

Priority Sheet Inserter
(PSI)

Y

Y

Y

Y*4

Envelope #10 (4.125x9.5 in)

Y

Y

DL (110x220 mm)

Y

Y

Y

Y*4

Letter (8.5x11 in)

Y

Y

Legal (8.5x14 in)

Y

Y

Folio (8.5x13 in)

Y

Y

Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in)

Y

Y

Custom*2*3

Y

Y

Monarch LEF (7.5x3.875 in)

DL LEF (220x110

*1

*1

mm)*1

You can place the originals in a long-edge feed direction or in a short-edge feed
direction. The following illustration shows SEF and LEF. The arrow mark in the
illustration shows the orientation of the paper loading.

NOTE: Not available when the XPS Printer Driver is used.
*2

Custom width: 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)
The maximum width for envelope (DL LEF): 220.0 mm (8.66 inches)
Custom length: 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
(For the PSI, 191.0 mm (7.50 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches))
The maximum length for envelope (Monarch LEF): 98.4 mm (3.87 inches)

*3

Only the administrator user can set the custom size from the printer driver.

*4

Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that is
loaded on the MPF will be fed.

SEF

LEF

Print Media Guidelines

197

Supported Paper Types
Media

Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)

Priority Sheet Inserter
(PSI)

Plain

Y*

Y*

Plain Side 2

Y

Y

Plain Thick

Y

Y

Plain Thick Side 2

Y

Y

Recycled

Y

Y

Recycled Side 2

Y

Y

Label

Y

Y

Covers

Y

Y

Covers Side 2

Y

Y

Envelope

Y

Y

Coated

Y

Y

Coated Side 2

Y

Y

* Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

198

Print Media Guidelines

Paper Type Specifications
Paper type

Weight (gsm)

Remarks

Plain Paper

60-90

-

Plain Thick Paper

91-105

-

Covers

106-163

-

Coated

106-163

Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.

Label

-

Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.

Envelopes

-

-

Recycled

60-105

-

Print Media Guidelines

199

200

Print Media Guidelines

13

Loading Print Media

Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free
printing.
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print
media. This information is usually on the print media package.
NOTE: After loading paper in the feeder, specify the same paper type on the
operator panel.

Capacity
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) can hold:
•

150 sheets of standard paper

•

16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of thick paper

•

One sheet of coated paper

•

16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of post cards

•

Five envelopes

•

16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of labels

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) can hold:
•

10 sheets of standard paper or one sheet of other paper

Print Media Dimensions
Both MPF and PSI accept print media within the following dimensions:
•

Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)

•

Length — 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)

Loading Print Media

201

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
1 Open the front cover.

2 Pull the priority sheet inserter (PSI) out.

3 Pull the length guide forward until it stops.

202

Loading Print Media

4 Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.

5 Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum width.

Loading Print Media

203

6 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

7 Load print media on the MPF with the top edge first and with the
recommended print side facing up.

204

Loading Print Media

8 Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the
stack of print media.

9 Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.

Loading Print Media

205

NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension

backward until it stops, and then pinch the length guide and slide it backward
until it touches print media.

10 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on
the paper tray.

206

Loading Print Media

11 Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than
plain print media is loaded. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the
MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the operator panel.
NOTE: For standard-size papers, adjust the guides first and then set papers.

Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the
printer driver. If not specified, the print image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or Monarch

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing
down, and the flap turned to the right.
Loading Print Media

207

To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to
be loaded with the print-side facing up, flap opened, and facing you.

When Loading C5

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.

208

Loading Print Media

NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to
paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed
from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below
when loading them in the MPF.

NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.

Loading Print Media

209

NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes,
see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator on the printer driver.

Loading Letterhead
Load the letter head in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that
the title on the letter head enters the printer first.

210

Loading Print Media

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter
(PSI)
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the PSI while printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
1 Open the front cover.

2 Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper
tray.

Loading Print Media

211

3 Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum width.

4 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

212

Loading Print Media

5 Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the
recommended print side facing up.

6 Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the
stack of print media.

Loading Print Media

213

7 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is
not standard plain paper. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the
PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.

Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
NOTE: Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that
is loaded on the MPF will be fed.
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the
printer driver. If not specified, the print image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or Monarch

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing
down, and the flap turned to the right.

214

Loading Print Media

To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to
be loaded with the print-side facing up, flap opened, and facing you.

When Loading C5

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.

Loading Print Media

215

NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to
paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the PSI right after they have been removed
from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below
when loading them in the PSI.

NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.

216

Loading Print Media

NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes,
see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator on the printer driver.

Loading Letterhead
Load the letter head in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that
the title on the letter head enters the printer first.

Loading Print Media

217

Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer Driver
Only)
NOTE: When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into
the feeder.
NOTE: The XPS printer driver does not support manual duplex printing.
When you start manual duplex printing, the instruction window appears.
Note that the window cannot be reopened once it is closed. Do not close the
window until duplex printing is complete.
Manual duplex printing can be done using the multipurpose feeder or the
priority sheet inserter.

The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
1 First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, rear sides are printed in the order of page 6, page
4, then page 2.
(Data LED) blinks and the message appears on the LCD when the
even pages finish printing.

2 After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output
tray and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up).
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them
before setting them.

218

Loading Print Media

3 Stack the prints and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up)
into the MPF. Ensure that Insert Output into paper tray is
highlighted, and then press the
button. Print pages in the order page 1
(rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5 (rear of page 6).

NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document
consists of various sizes of papers.

The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
1 First print the even pages.
For a six page document, even pages are printed in the order page 2, page
4, then page 6.
(Data LED) blinks and the message appears on the LCD when the
even pages finish printing.

Loading Print Media

219

2 After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output
tray and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up).
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them
before setting them.

3 Next stack the prints and set them as they are (with the blank side face up)
into the PSI. Ensure that Insert Output into paper tray is
highlighted, and then press the
button. Print pages in the order page 1
(rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5 (rear of page 6).

220

Loading Print Media

NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document
consists of various sizes of papers.

Using the Output Tray Extension
The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling
from the printer after the print job is complete.
Before printing a document, ensure that the output tray extension is fully
extended.

NOTE: When you pull out envelopes or small size print media, lift up the scanner

unit.

Loading Print Media

221

222

Loading Print Media

14

Operator Panel
Using the Operator Panel Buttons

The operator panel has a 4-line by 28-character liquid crystal display (LCD),
light-emitting diodes (LED), control buttons, and numeric keypad, which
allow you to control the printer.

1 One Touch Dial button
•

2

Calls up the stored Fax number registered in the Phone Book. The
first four fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the buttons
in row order, starting from the top corner.
(Copy) button

•
3

Moves to the top level of the Copy menu.
(Fax) button

•

Moves to the top level of the Fax menu.

4 Data LED
•

Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending Fax jobs.

5 Ready / Error LED
•

Lights up when the printer is ready. (Ready LED)

•

Lights up when the printer has an error. (Error LED)

Operator Panel

223

6

button
•

7

Moves a cursor or highlight right or left.
button

•
8

Moves a cursor or highlight up or down.
(Set) button

•
9

Confirms the entry of values.
(Contacts) button

•
10

Moves to the Address Book menu for the Fax and Scan services.
(Re-dial / Pause) button

•

Re-dials a telephone number.

•

Pauses a telephone number.

11

(Cancel) button
•

Cancels the current processing or pending job.

12 B&W / Color LED
•
13

Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected.
(Color Mode) button

•
14

Switches the color mode.
(Start) button

•
15

Starts a job.
(Backspace) button

•
16

Deletes characters and numbers.
(Speed Dial) button

•

Calls up a stored telephone number.

17 Numeric keypad
•

Enters characters and numbers.

18 AC (All Clear) button
•
19

(Back) button
•

224

Resets the current setting, and returns to the top menu.
Returns to the previous screen.

Operator Panel

20 LCD Panel
•

Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.

21

(Scan) button
•

22

Moves to the top level of the Scan menu.
(Menu) button

•

Moves to the top level of the Print From USB Memory, Job Status, and
System menus.

NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the
current entry or setting. Make sure to press the
button to save the current
entry or setting.
NOTE: For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric
characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters" on page 285.

Printing a Panel Settings Page
The panel settings page shows current settings for the operator panel menus.

The Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
press the

button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then
button.

The panel settings page is printed.

The Tool Box
NOTE:
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Tool Box.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the

Select Printer window appears. In this case, click the name of this printer
listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.
Operator Panel

225

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reports page is displayed.
4 Click the Panel Settings button.
The panel settings page is printed.

226

Operator Panel

Printing, Copying,
Scanning, and Faxing

227

228

15

Printing

This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information
from your printer, and how to cancel a job.

Tips for Successful Printing
Tips on Storing Print Media
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print
Media" on page 196.

Avoiding Paper Jams
NOTE: It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are
considering using with the printer before purchasing large quantities.
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid
paper jams. See the following instructions on loading print media:
•

"Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202

•

"Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211

•

"Avoiding Jams" on page 459

If you experience a jam, see "Jam" on page 492 for instructions.

Sending a Job to Print
Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer. When you
choose Print from a software program, a window representing the printer
driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are
sending to print. Print settings selected from the driver have precedence over
the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or Tool Box.
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all the
available system settings you can change. If you are not familiar with a feature
in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.
To print a job from a typical Windows® application:
Printing

229

1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the File menu, select Print.
3 Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the
system settings as needed (such as the pages you want to print or the
number of copies).
4 To adjust system settings not available from the first screen, such as
Quality, Paper Size, or Image Orientation, click Preferences.
The Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
5 Specify the print settings. For more information, click Help.
6 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
7 Click Print to send the job to the selected printer.

Canceling a Print Job
There are several methods for canceling a print job.

Canceling From the Operator Panel
To cancel a job after it has started printing:
1 Press the

(Cancel) button.

NOTE: Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will
continue to print.

Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar

When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner
of the taskbar.
1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select the job you want to cancel.
3 Press Delete on the keyboard.

230

Printing

Canceling a Job From the Desktop

1 Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.
Click StartPrinters and Faxes (for Windows XP and 2003).
Click Start Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server®
2008 R2).
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers (for
Windows Vista®).
Click Start Control Panel Printers (for Windows Server 2008).
A list of available printers appears.
2 Double-click the printer you selected when you sent the job.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
3 Select the job you want to cancel.
4 Press Delete on the keyboard.

Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device
The Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB
storage device by operating from the operator panel.

Supported File Formats
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB storage
device.
•

PDF

•

TIFF

•

JPEG

To print a file in a USB storage device:
1 Insert a USB storage device to the USB port of the printer.
USB Memory appears.
2 Ensure that Print From is highlighted, and then press the

button.

Select Document appears.

Printing

231

3 Press the
button until the desired file is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Select printing options as required.
NOTE: You can print files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory
feature. Files saved without using the feature such as files created by user
may not be printed properly.

Printing a Report Page
By using the Report/List menu, you can print a various of settings for
your printer including printer settings, panel settings, job history, error
history, color test page, protocol monitor, address book, and fax activity. This
section describes two examples of printing from the Report/List menu.

Printing a System Settings Page
To verify detailed printer settings, print a printer settings page.
See "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 or "Understanding the
Tool Box Menus" on page 323 to identify the display and operator panel
buttons if you need help.

The Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
The system settings page is printed.
5 Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network on the
system settings page.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP
address automatically, and then print the system settings page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.
232

Printing

Printer Settings
Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the Tool Box.
NOTE:
NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.
These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are
restored.
To select a new value as a setting:
1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers  Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer  Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer

drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select the desired menu item.
Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:
•

A phrase or word to describe a setting

•

A numerical value that can be changed

•

An On or Off setting

4 Select the desired value, and then click the associated button with each
menu item.
Driver settings may have precedence over changes previously made and
may require you to change the Tool Box defaults.

Adjusting the Language
To display a different language on the operator panel:
From the Printer Operator Panel

1 Press the

(Menu) button.

Printing

233

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
press the

button until Panel Language is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
press the

button until the desired language is highlighted, and then
button.

From Your Computer

NOTE:
1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer  Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer

drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The System Settings page is displayed.
4 Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then press the
Apply New Settings button.

234

Printing

Copying

16

Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are
printing, faxing, or copying. For more details, see "Loading Print Media" on
page 201.

Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
to load an original document for copying, scanning and sending a fax. You can
load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job using the ADF
or one sheet at a time using the document glass.
CAUTION: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 in. by 5.5 in. (139.7
mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5 in. by 14 in. (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different
sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents
having other unusual characteristics in ADF.
CAUTION: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or
thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot
be used in ADF.
CAUTION: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to
adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use
the document glass instead of the ADF.

Making Copies From the Document Glass
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the
ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.
NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy
printout. For best results, clean the document glass before use. For more
information, see "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.
Copying

235

To make a copy from the document glass:
1 Open the document cover.

2 Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.

3 Close the document cover.
NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy
quality and increase the toner consumption.

NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the document

cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open.

236

Copying

4 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the
contrast, and the image quality. For more information, see "Setting Copy
Options" on page 238.
To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button.
5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: Press the
(Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while
scanning a document.

Making Copies From the ADF
NOTICE: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35
sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied
before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the
document glass instead of the ADF.
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
1 Load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents face up on the ADF
with top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document guides
to the correct document size.

NOTE: Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal-size
document.
2 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size,
contrast, and image quality. For more information, see "Setting Copy
Options" on page 238.

Copying

237

To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button.
3 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: Press the
(Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while
scanning a document.

Setting Copy Options
Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing the
(Start) button to make copies.
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying.

Number of Copies
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad to select the desired
value.
4 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Color
To select mode for color or black and white copying.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
238

Copying

2 Press the
3 Press the
4 Press the

(Copy) button.
(Color Mode) button to select the desired color mode.
(Start) button to begin copying.

Collated
To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page
documents, one complete three page document will print followed by the
second complete document.
NOTE: Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available
memory.
If a memory shortage occurs, cancel the collating by turning Collated to
Uncollated on the operator panel.

1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Ensure that Collated is highlighted, and then press the
4 Press the
button.

button.

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Uncollated*

Does not sort the copy job

Collated

Sorts the copy job

Copying

239

Auto

Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job

5 If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies,
contrast, and image quality. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 238.
6 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Reduce/Enlarge
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400
percent when you copy original documents from the document glass or ADF.
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or
Manual.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the
press the

button until Reduce/Enlarge is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
button.

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

mm series

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
200%
A5A4 (141%)
A5B5 (122%)
100%*

240

Copying

B5A5 (81%)
A4A5 (70%)
50%

inch series

200%
StmtLgl (154%)
StmtLtr (129%)
100%*
LglLtr (78%)
LdgrLtr (64%)
50%

NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or
Manual.
NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from
25% to 400%, or press the
button to enlarge the zoom ratio or press the
button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.
5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Document Size
To specify the default document size:
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the
3 Press the
press the

(Copy) button.
button until Document Size is highlighted, and then
button.
Copying

241

4 Press the
button.

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1

The default for Document Size
varies depending on country
specific factory default.

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Original Type
To select the copy image quality.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the
press the

button until Original Type is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
button.

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

242

Copying

Text

Suitable for documents with text.

Text & Photo* Used for documents with both text and photos.
Photo

5 Press the

Suitable for documents with photos.

(Start) button to begin copying.

Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the
3 Press the
press the

(Copy) button.
button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
or
button.

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Lighter2
Lighter1

Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark
print.

Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light
print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Copying

243

Sharpness
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the
button until Sharpness is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the
button.

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Sharpest

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal*

Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Softer

Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softest

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Auto Exposure
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
244

Copying

2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the
press the

button until Auto Exposure is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
button.

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Multiple-Up
To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Copying

245

Auto:
Automatically
reduces the
pages to fit in one
page.

ID Copy:
Always prints two
sides of the ID card
in one page in the
original size (by
100%).

Manual:
Reduces the pages in
the custom size
depending on the setting
of the Reduce/Enlarge
menu.

1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.

246

Copying

2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the
button until Multiple-Up is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button.

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one
sheet of paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the
original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in
the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

5 If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies,
contrast, and image quality. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 238.
6 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

When you are using the document glass and Multiple-Up is set to
Auto, ID Copy, or Manual, the display prompts you for another page.
Press the
button to select Yes or No, and then press the
button.
7 If you select Yes, press the
button to select Continue or Cancel,
and then press the
button.

Margin Top/Bottom
To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.

Copying

247

2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the
button until Margin Top/Bottom is highlighted, and
then press the
button.
4 Press the
or
button or enter the desired value using the numeric
keypad, and then press the
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
4 mm*/0.2
inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.02.0 inch

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Margin Left/Right
To specify the left and right margins of the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the
button until Margin Left/Right is highlighted, and
then press the
button.
4 Press the
or
button or enter the desired value using the numeric
keypad, and then press the
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

248

Copying

4 mm*/0.2
inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.02.0 inch

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Margin Middle
To specify the middle margin of the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the
3 Press the
press the

(Copy) button.
button until Margin Middle is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
or
button or enter the desired value using the numeric
keypad, and then press the
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
0 mm*/
0.0 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/
0.0-2.0 inch

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Copying

249

Changing the Default Settings
The COPY menu options, including contrast, and image quality can be set to
the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the default
settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding buttons
on the operator panel.
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing the AC (All Clear) button cancels the
changed settings and returns to the default status.
To create your own default settings:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Ensure that Copy Defaults is highlighted, and then press the
button.
5 Press the
press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Press the
or
button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter
the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option
You can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer waits before it
restores the default copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing
them on the operator panel.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.

250

Copying

4 Press the
press the

button until System Settings is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Ensure that Power Saver Timer is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the
button.

button to select Mode 1 or Mode 2, and then press the

7 Press the
or
button or enter the desired value using the numeric
keypad, and then press the
button.
You can select from 5–30 minutes for Mode 1 or 1–6 minutes for Mode
2.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Copying

251

252

Copying

17

Scanning
Scanning Overview

You can use your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer to turn
pictures and text into editable images on your computer.
PaperPort® is a program that enables you to organize, find and share all your
paper and digital documents, and is supplied with your printer.
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item
type and how you plan to use the image or document after you scan it in to
your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.
Type

Resolution

Documents

300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi
grayscale or color

Documents of poor quality or that
contain small text

400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi
grayscale

Photographs and pictures

100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale

Images for an inkjet printer

150–300 dpi

Images for a high-resolution printer

300–600 dpi

Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities
of the application. If you require a resolution above those recommended in
the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or
pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.
NOTE: You can use PaperPort's built-in Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
software to copy text from scanned documents so that you can use and edit the text
in any text editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR process
requires textual images scanned at 150–600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is
recommended for graphics.

Scanning

253

If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe® Photoshop®, you
must assign the application to the printer by selecting it from the list of
available applications through the Select Software button each time you start
scanning. If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button,
PaperPort is automatically selected when you start scanning.
ScanDirect is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send
them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without first
running PaperPort. ScanDirect runs as a separate application from the
Windows start menu and displays the ScanDirect bar. For more information
about using ScanDirect, refer to the PaperPort's Help menu.

Icons on the ScanDirect bar represent the programs that are limited to
PaperPort and to ScanDirect. To scan and send an item to a program, click the
program icon and then scan the item. ScanDirect automatically starts the
selected program when the scan is complete.

Scanning From the Operator Panel
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Scan) button.

3 Press the
button until Scan to Application is highlighted, and
then press the
button.
4 Configure the scanning settings as necessary.
5 Press the

(Start) button.

The selected application window opens on your computer.
254

Scanning

NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select
1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scan Button Manager, and then click OK.

NOTE: Once you check the Always use this program for this action check box
when selecting 1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scan Button Manager, the selected
application is automatically used without displaying the program selection window.
NOTE: You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the
settings for scanning. For details, see "Quick Launch Utility" on page 410.

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
Your printer supports the Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN)
driver for scanning images. TWAIN is one of the standard components
provided by Microsoft® Windows XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows
Server 2008, Windows Vista®, and Windows 7, and works with various
scanners.
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.

Scanning

255

To scan an image from the PaperPort:
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 On the Windows Start menu, click Nuance PaperPort 12 from All
Programs, and then click PaperPort.
3 Click Select, then select TWAIN: Dell 1355cn/cnw MFP Scanner, and
then click OK.
4 Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview
image.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.

5 Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options
tabs.
6 Click Scan to start scanning.
7 Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to
your computer.
256

Scanning

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition
(WIA) Driver
Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of
the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and later
operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the
TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily
manipulate those images without using additional software.
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Start the drawing software, such as Paint for Windows.
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows
Photo Gallery instead of Paint.

3 Click File From Scanner or Camera (Paint button From scanner or
camera for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
The Scan using Dell 1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scanner window appears.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.

Scanning

257

4 Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the
scanned picture to display the Advanced Properties dialog box.
5 Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then
click OK.
6 Click Scan to start scanning.
7 Click Save As from the File menu.
8 Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the
picture.

258

Scanning

Using a Scanner on the Network
Overview
The Scan to Server/Computer feature allows you to scan documents and send
the scanned document to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.
Computer
FTP Server

Scan
Using FTP

Using SMB

Computer

You can select the kind of the server and specify a destination to store the
scanned document with the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address
Book Editor.
The following items are required to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.
•

Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following
operating systems that includes folder sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
•

Microsoft Windows Server 2003

•

Microsoft Windows Server 2008

•

Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2

•

Microsoft Windows XP
Scanning

259

•

•

Microsoft Windows Vista

•

Microsoft Windows 7

•

Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6

Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account
to the FTP server (login name and password) are required.
•

Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2, Microsoft Windows Vista, or
Microsoft Windows 7
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0

•

Microsoft Windows XP
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0/4.0 or
Internet Information Services 5.0/5.1

•

Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X
10.4.2/10.4.4/10.4.8/10.4.9/10.4.10/10.4.11/10.5/10.6

For information on how to configure the FTP service, contact your system
administrator.
Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.

"Confirming a Login name and Password" on page 261

"Specifying a Destination to Store the Document" on page 262

"Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 271

260

Scanning

"Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 279

Confirming a Login name and Password
When using SMB:

The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user login account with a
valid and non-empty password for authentication. Confirm a login user name
and password.

If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password
on your User Login Account with the following procedure.
For Microsoft Windows XP:

1 Click startControl PanelUser Accounts.
2 Click Change an account.
3 Select your account.
4 Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Vista and Windows 7:

1 Click StartControl Panel.
2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety.

Scanning

261

3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your
user login account.
For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click StartControl Panel.
2 Double-click User Accounts.
3 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your
user login account.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click StartControl Panel.
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your
user login account.
For Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6

1 Click System PreferencesAccounts.
2 Select Change Password.
3 Enter a password for your user login account in New password.
4 Re-enter the password in Verify.
After you confirmed a login user name and password, go to "Specifying a
Destination to Store the Document" on page 262.
When using FTP

The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user name and a password.
For your user name and password, contact your system administrator.

Specifying a Destination to Store the Document
When using SMB

Share a folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure.

262

Scanning

For Windows XP Home Edition:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of
folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.
3 Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network.
4 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the
next setting procedure.

NOTE: When the following screen appears, click If you understand the

security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here,
then select Just enable file sharing, and then click OK.

Scanning

263

5 Select Allow network users to change my files.
6 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have
created.
Example: Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory

After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on
page 271.

264

Scanning

For Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of
folder name, MyShare) and double-click the folder.
2 Select Folder Options from Tools.

3 Click View tab, and then clear the checkbox of Use simple file sharing
(Recommended).

Scanning

265

4 Click OK, and then close the window.
5 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
6 Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder.
7 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the
next setting procedure.

8 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
9 Click Add.
10 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name
in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to
confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).

266

Scanning

11 Click OK.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
12 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full
Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document
into this folder.

Scanning

267

13 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have
created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on
page 271.
For Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, Windows
Server 2008 R2

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of
folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.

3 Click the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.
4 Select the Share this folder check box.
268

Scanning

5 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next
setting procedure.

6 Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder.
7 Click Add.
8 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name
in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to
confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).

Scanning

269

9 Click OK when you are done.
10 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full
Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document
to this folder.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.

11 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have
created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on
page 271.
For Mac OS X 10.4:

1 Select Go from the Finder menu, and then click Home.

270

Scanning

2 Double-click Public.
3 Create a folder (Example of folder name, MyShare).
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next
setting procedure.

4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Check the File Sharing check box and the Windows Sharing check box.
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of
folder name, MyShare).
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next
setting procedure.

2 Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.
3 Check the Shared folder check box, and then close the window.
4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Check the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.
6 Check the Share Files and folders using SMB check box and your account
name.
7 Click Done.
When Using FTP

For a destination to store the document, contact your system administrator.

Configuring the Printer Settings
You can configure the printer settings to use the Scan to Server/Computer
feature with the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar.
NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying
the IP Settings" on page 56.

3 Click Go.
Scanning

271

The printer's web page appears.
4 Click Address Book if a security login dialog box appears, type in the
correct user name and password.
NOTE: The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank
(NULL).

5 Click the Server Address tab.
6 Select any unused number and click Create.

272

Scanning

The Server Address page appears.

1

2

3
4
5
6

7
8
9

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:

Scanning

273

1

Name

Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the
Server address book.

2

Server Type

Select SMB if you store the document in a shared folder of
your computer.

3

Server Address

Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the
FTP server that you have shared out.

Select FTP if you use a FTP server.

The following are examples:
• For FTP:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.168.1.100
• For SMB:
Server name: myhost
IP address: 192.168.1.100
4

Share Name

For SMB only.
On the Windows operating system, enter the share name
of the folder to store the scanned document on the
recipient computer.
On the Mac OS, enter the folder name to store the
scanned document on the recipient computer.

274

Scanning

5

Server Path

For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly
without creating any subfolder, leave the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created
under the share folder, enter the path as following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level
folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\Mypic\John in your
directory.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John

In this case, enter the following item.
Server Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the server path to store the scanned document.
6

Server Port
Number

Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can
enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP.

7

Login Name

Enter the user account name that has access to the shared
folder on your computer or FTP server.

8

Login Password

Enter the password corresponding to the above login
name.

NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Computer

feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user
login account. (See "Confirming a Login name and Password"
on page 261 for details on how to add a password in your
user login account.)
9

Re-enter Password Re-enter your password.

After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the
Network" on page 279.

Scanning

275

From the Address Book Editor

1 Click StartAll ProgramsDell PrintersDell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Address Book Editor.
The Select Device window appears.
2 Select your printer from the list.
3 Click OK.
4 Click ToolNew (Printer Address Book)Server.

The Server Address dialog box appears.

276

Scanning

1

2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:

1

Name

Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the
Server address book.

2

Server Type

Select Computer (SMB) if you store the document in a
shared folder of your computer.
Select Server (FTP) if you use a FTP server.

3

Computer
Settings wizard

Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides
you through several steps.
When you complete the steps in the wizard, the items 4 to
10 are entered automatically. For details, click the Help
button.

Scanning

277

4

Sever Name/
IP Address

Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the
FTP server that you have shared out.
The following are examples:
• For Computer (SMB):
Server name: myhost
IP address: 192.168.1.100
• For Server (FTP):
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.168.1.100

5

Share Name

Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient
computer. For SMB only.

6

Path

For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly
without creating any subfolder, leave the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created
under the share folder, enter the path as following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level
folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your
directory.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John

In this case, enter the following item.
Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the path to store the scanned document.
7

278

Login Name

Scanning

Enter the user account name that has access to the shared
folder on your computer or FTP server.

8

Login Password

Enter the password corresponding to the above login
name.

NOTE: NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to

Server/Computer feature. Ensure that you have a valid
password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a
Login name and Password" on page 261 for details on how to
add a password in your user login account).

9

Confirm Login
Password

Re-enter your password.

10

Port Number

Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can
enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP.

After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the
Network" on page 279.

Sending the Scanned File on the Network
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the
3 Press the
press the

(Scan) button.
button until Scan to Network is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Ensure that Scan to is highlighted, press the

button.

5 Press the
button to select Network (Computer) or Network
(Server), or Search Address book, and then press the
button.
Network (Computer): Stores the scanned image on the computer by
using the SMB protocol.
Network (Server): Stores the scanned image on the server by using
the FTP protocol.
Search Address Book: Select the server address registered in
Address Book.
Scanning

279

6 Press the
button to select the destination to store the scanned file in,
and then press the
button.
7 Press the

(Start) button to send the scanned files.

Scanning to USB Storage Device
The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the
scanned data to a USB storage device. To scan documents and save them,
follow the steps below:
1 Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on your printer.

2 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
3 Press the

(Scan) button.

4 Ensure that Scan to USB Memory is highlighted, and then press the
button.

280

5 Press the
press the

button until the your desired folder is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Press the

(Start) button.

Scanning

Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image
To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your printer, follow
the steps below:
•

Setup the E-mail address book through the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool. See "Setting an E-Mail Address Book" on page 281 for more
details.

Setting an E-Mail Address Book
1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click Go. The
printer's Web page appears.
3 Click the Address Book tab.
The login dialog box appears.
4 Type in the administrator login ID and password registered on the printer.
5 Click Address Book.

6 Click Create.
Scanning

281

7 Enter a name and e-mail address in the Name and E-mail Address fields.
8 Click the Apply New Settings button.

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the
3 Press the
press the

(Scan) button.
button until Scan to Email is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Ensure that Email to is highlighted, and then press the

button.

5 Press the
button to select the setting listed below, and then press the
button.

282

Scanning

Keypad: Type the e-mail address directly and then press the
button.
Address Book: Select the e-mail address registered in the E-mail
address book, and then press the
button.
Email Group: Select the e-mail group registered in the E-mail Groups,
and then press the
button.
NOTE: Users need to be registered before you can select Address Book
on the operator panel.

6 Press the

(Start) button to send e-mail.

Scanning

283

284

Scanning

18

Faxing

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For
example, when you set up your printer, you enter your name or your company
name and telephone number. When you store speed dial or group dial
numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.

•

When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the
correct letter appears on the display.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.
–

Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O
and finally 6.

–

To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.

–

Press the

button when you are finished.

Keypad Letters and Numbers
Key

Assigned numbers, letters or characters

1

@ : . / 1

2

a b c A B C 2

3

d e f D E F 3

4

g h iG H I 4

5

j k l J K L 5
Faxing

285

Key

Assigned numbers, letters or characters

6

m n o M N O 6

7

p q r s P Q R S 7

8

t u v T U V 8

9

w x y z W X Y Z 9

0

0

*

- _~

#

@ .
< >

_ ! " # $ % & ' ~^ | ` ; : ? , (space) + - * / = ( ) [ ] { }

Changing Numbers or Names
If an incorrect name or number is entered, press the
(Backspace) button
to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct number or
character.

Inserting a Pause
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen
for a second dial tone. A pause must be entered in order for the access code to
function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on
the display to indicate when a pause is entered.

Configuring Fax Initial Settings
NOTE: The following settings can be configured also using Advance Tools on Easy
Setup Navigator.

Setting Your Country
You need to set the country where your printer is used for using the fax service
on the printer.

286

1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

Faxing

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Country is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the
button to select the country where the printer is used, and
then press the
button.
7 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
Yes, and then press the
button.

button to select

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.
NOTE: In case of either one, when you configure the country setting, the
information, which is registered to the device, is initialized.

Setting the Printer ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any
fax you send. The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or
company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Fax Number is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
6 Enter your fax number using the number keypad.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the
(Backspace) button to delete the last digit.

7 Press the

button when the number on the display is correct.

8 Press the
button until Company Name is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
Faxing

287

9 Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad.
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad,
including special symbols by pressing the 1, *, and # buttons.
For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric
characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters" on
page 285.
10 Press the

button when the name on the display is correct.

11 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Setting the Time and Date
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the
printer occurs.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
press the

button until System Settings is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Press the
button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
6 Ensure that Set Date is highlighted, and then press the
7 Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad, or press the
to select the correct date.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the
re-enter the digit.

8 Press the

button.
button
button to

button when the date on the display is correct.

9 Press the
button until Set Time is highlighted, and then press the
button.
10 Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad, or press the
to select the correct time.
11 Press the

288

Faxing

button when the time on the display is correct.

button

12 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Changing the Clock Mode
You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
press the

button until System Settings is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Press the
button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
6 Press the
button until Date Format is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
7 Press the
button until the desired format is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Setting Sounds
Speaker Volume
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Line Monitor is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
6 Press the
press the

button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then
button.
Faxing

289

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Ringer Volume
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Ring Tone Volume is highlighted, and
then press the
button.
6 Press the
press the

button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then
button.

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Specifying the Fax Settings
Changing the Fax Settings Options
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Press the
or
button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter
the value using the numeric keypad.
7 Press the

290

Faxing

button to save the selection.

8 If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 7.
9 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Available Fax Settings Options
You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:
Option
Receive Mode

Description
TEL Mode Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive
a fax by picking up the handset of the external
telephone, pressing the remote receive code, and then
pressing .
FAX
Mode*

Automatically receives faxes.

TEL/FAX
Mode

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the
external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto
Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that
the call is a telephone call.

Ans/FAX
Mode

The printer can share a telephone line with an
answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial
transmission in your country (such as Germany,
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and
Switzerland), this mode is not supported.

DRPD
Mode

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone
company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
specific ring pattern.

Auto Rec Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after receiving an incoming call.

Auto Rec
TEL/FAX

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Faxing

291

Option

Description

Auto Rec
Ans/FAX

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor

Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.

Ring Tone
Volume

Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive
Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Sets the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Sets the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial
Attempts

Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the
destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not
redial.

Redial Delay

Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone
Book.
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on
the external telephone.
Remote Rcv
Tone

Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote
Receive.

Fax Header

Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of
faxes.

Company
Name

Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to
30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Fax Number

Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of
faxes.

Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern

Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a
service provided by some telephone companies.

Forward
Settings

Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

292

Faxing

Option

Description

Fax Fwd
Number

Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming
faxes will be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial
Num

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials
before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the
Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size

Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto
the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the
bottom of the page.

ECM

Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote
machines must also support the ECM.

Modem Speed

Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or
reception error occurs.

Fax Activity

Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every
50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.

Protocol
Monitor

Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.

Country

Sets the country where the printer is used.

Prefix Dial

NOTE: Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to the
external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must do the following from the operator
panel.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.

Faxing

293

4 Press the
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Line Type is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the
button.

button until PBX is highlighted, and then press the

7 Press the

(Back) button to return to the previous menu.

8 Press the
button until Prefix Dial is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
9 Press the
button.

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

10 Press the

(Back) button to return to the previous menu.

11 Press the
press the

button until Prefix Dial Num is highlighted, and then
button.

12 Enter an up-to-five-digit prefix number from 0–9, *, and #.
13 Press the

button when the prefix dial number on the display is correct.

14 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Advanced Fax Settings
NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect
settings on this printer may damage the device.
If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax
settings menu which you can access and change the settings accordingly.
To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Disconnect all network, phone line, and USB cables from the device.
3 Turn on the printer while holding down the

and

buttons.

The Customer Mode menu appears.
4 After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn
off and on the printer for the new settings to be effective.

294

Faxing

Fax Data Encoding Method

Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi-level Image
Experts Group (JBIG) data encoding method. You may experience fax send or
receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and
select the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), or Modified
Modified Read (MMR) encoding with the following instructions.
You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following
instructions.
1 When the printer is in Customer Mode, select Fax/Scanner Diag
and press the
button.
2 Press the
button until Parameter is highlighted, and then press the
button.
3 Press the
press the

button until FAX Parameter is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
press the

button until G3M TX Coding is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Press the
button until MMR is highlighted, and then press the
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR to enable MR encoding, or
select MH to enable MH encoding.
You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.
1 When the printer is in Customer Mode, select Fax/Scanner Diag
and press the
button.
2 Press the
button until Parameter is highlighted, and then press the
button.
3 Press the
press the

button until FAX Parameter is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Press the
press the

button until G3M RX Coding is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Press the
button until MMR is highlighted, and then press the
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR to enable MR encoding, or
select MH to enable MH encoding.

Faxing

295

Sending a Fax
You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred
from the computer running a Microsoft® Windows® operating system.

Loading an Original Document on the ADF
NOTICE: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35
sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied
before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the
document glass instead of the ADF.
1 Place the document(s) face up on the ADF with the top edge of the
documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the correct
document size.

2 Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 298.

Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass
1 Open the document cover.

296

Faxing

2 Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.

3 Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 298.
4 Close the document cover.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the
ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.
NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.

Faxing

297

Resolution
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission:
1 Press the

(Fax) button.

2 Press the
button until Resolution is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
3 Press the
press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then
button.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin
lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail.
The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine
also supports the super fine resolution.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest
resolution supported by the receiving device.

Document Type
To select the default document type for the current fax job:
1 Press the

298

(Fax) button.

2 Press the
press the

button until Document Type is highlighted, and then
button.

3 Press the
button.

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

Text

Suitable for documents with text.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

Faxing

Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original:
1 Press the
2 Press the
press the

(Fax) button.
button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then
button.

3 Press the
or
button.

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Lighter2
Lighter1

Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with
dark print.

Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with
light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Sending a Fax Automatically
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF:
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.
4 You can select a fax number in one of the following ways:
•

button.
Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the
Press the
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then
press the
button. Press the
button to select the recipients.

•

Press the One Touch Dial button.
Faxing

299

•

Press the
(Contacts) button, select All Entries, Group
Dial, or Search using the
button, and then press the
button.
All Entries

Displays a list of registered fax numbers. Press the
button to select the recipients.

Group Dial

Press the

Search

Searches a fax number from the Phone Book. Enter
the text you want to search, and then press the
button. Press the
button to select the recipients.

button to select the recipients.

(Redial/Pause) button to redial.

•

Press the

•

Press the
(Speed Dial) button. Enter the speed dial number
between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
NOTE: Before you use the One Touch Dial button, you need to register a

number for the speed dial. For more information on how to store the number,
see "Automatic Dialing" on page 311.

5 Press the

(Start) button.

When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for
another page. Press the
button to select Yes or No, and then press the
button.
6 The number is dialed and then the printer begins sending the fax when the
remote fax machine is ready.
NOTE: Press the
sending the fax.

(Cancel) button to cancel the fax job at any time while

Sending a Fax Manually
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.

300

Faxing

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.
4 Press the
button.

button until OnHook is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the
button.

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

6 Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric
keypad.
(Start) button.

•

If the document is loaded on the ADF, press the

•

If the document is not loaded on the ADF, press the
(Start)
button, press the
button until the desired setting appears, and
then press the
button.

NOTE: Press the
(Cancel) button and the
any time while sending the fax.

button to cancel the fax job at

Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer
beeps and returns to the standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on
the display.
If you receive an error message, press the
(Cancel) button to clear the
message and try to send the document again.
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after
each fax transmission. For more information, see "Printing a Report" on
page 319.

Faxing

301

Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a
fax, the printer will automatically redial the number every minute based on
the number set in the redial settings.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial
attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.
NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the
number was manually entered.

Sending a Delayed Fax
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for
transmission at a specified time in order to take advantage of lower long
distance rates.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the

(Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.
4 Press the
press the

button until Delayed Start is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Press the
button.

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

6 Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press the
or
button to select the start time, and then press the
button.
7 Press the
button.

button until Fax to is highlighted, and then press the

8 Ensure that Keypad is highlighted, and then press the
302

Faxing

button.

9 Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad, and
then press the
button.
You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers. For more information,
see "Automatic Dialing" on page 311.
Press the

(Start) button to begin faxing.

Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all the documents
to be faxed to its memory and sends them at the specified time. After faxing
in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as
the printer is activated.

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)
You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.

Example
Send data via the Dell 1355cnw
Color MFP FAX driver
Sending machine (Dell
1355cn Multifunction
Color Printer)

Send fax
Receiving machine (fax
machine/multifunction
printer)

For Microsoft Windows:

NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those
given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using.
NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver.
1 Open the file you want to send by fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell
1355cnw Color MFP FAX.
3 Click Preferences.

Faxing

303

4 The Printing Preferences dialog box appears. Specify the fax settings. For
more information, click the Help of the driver.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.

304

Faxing

5 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
6 Click Print. The Set / Check Fax Transmission: dialog box appears.
7 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
•

Enter a name and phone number directly.

•

Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.

•

Select a recipient from a database other than a phone book or address
book.

For more information on how to specify the destination, see the Help of
the driver.

Faxing

305

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area
before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked with a password.

8 Click Start Sending.
For Apple Macintosh:

NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those
given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using.
NOTE: When using a USB connection on Mac OS 10.4.x, upgrade Common Unix
Printing System (CUPS) software to version 1.2.12 or later. You can download it from
CUPS web site.
1 Open the file you want to send by fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell 1355
Color MFP Fax.

306

Faxing

3 Specify the fax settings.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
4 Click Print. The Fax Recipient dialog box appears.
5 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
•

Enter a name and phone number directly.

•

Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.

Faxing

307

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area
before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked with a password.

6 Click OK.

Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering
machine to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the TEL Mode.

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the PSI are the same whether you are
printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-,
A4-, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print
Media" on page 201. For details about setting the paper type and size in the
PSI, see "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189.

308

Faxing

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a
specified period of time and receives the fax.
To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after
receiving an incoming call, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode
You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone, and
then pressing the
(Start) button.
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the
reception is completed.

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans/Fax Mode
To use the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode, you must attach an external
telephone to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it
would normally. If your printer hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically
starts to receive a fax.
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Auto Answer Fax and your answering
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your printer,
your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone
This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected
to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer. You can receive a fax
from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having to
go to the printer.
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press
the two-digit keys on the external telephone, or set On Hook to Off and
then press the
(Start) button.
The printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try pressing the two-digit keys once again.

Faxing

309

The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. You can change the twodigit number to whatever you choose. For details on changing the code, see
"Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.
NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode
The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The
particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short
ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring
service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.
To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your FAX
number from outside.
To set up the DRPD:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until DRPD Pattern is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
6 Press the
press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then
button.

7 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD Mode; see
"Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.
Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from
your telephone company, ask your telephone company which pattern you
need to select to use this service.
310

Faxing

Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing,
or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the memory.
Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables,
the printer automatically prints the fax.

Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive
it.
1 Press the

(Fax) button.

2 Press the
press the

button until Polling Receive is highlighted, and then
button.

3 Press the
button.

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

4 Enter the fax number of the remote machine, and then press the
button.
NOTE: For information on how to enter the fax number of the remote machine,
see "Sending a Fax Manually" on page 300 or "Sending a Fax Automatically" on
page 299.

5 Press the

(Start) button.

Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (01–
99).
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you
cannot change the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.

Storing a Number for Speed Dialing
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

Faxing

311

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Ensure that Speed Dial is highlighted, and then press the

button.

6 Press the
button until the desired speed dial number between 01 and
99 is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the
8 Enter the name, and then press the

button.

button.

9 Ensure that Phone Number is highlighted, and then press the
button.
10 Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then
press the
button.
(Redial/Pause) button.

To insert a pause between numbers, press the
"-" appears on the display.

11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
12 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
Yes, and then press the
button.

button to select

13 To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
14 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.

312

Faxing

2 To enter the speed dial number do either of the following after pressing the
(Fax) button:
•

Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the
button.
Press the
button until Speed Dial is highlighted, and then
press the
button.

•

Press the

(Speed Dial) button.

3 Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad,
and then press the
button.
The corresponding entry's name briefly displays. To confirm the name
again, press the
button.
4 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.
5 Press the

(Start) button.

6 The document scans to the memory.
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for
another page. Press the
button to select Yes to add more documents
or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately, and then press the
button.
7 The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed.
The document is sent when the remote fax machine answers.
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple
locations. For example, if you enter 0*, you can send a document to the locations
registered between 01 and 09.

Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can
create a group of these destinations and set them under a one-digit group dial
location. This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the
same document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial
number.

Faxing

313

Setting Group Dial
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
6 Press the
button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6
is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the
8 Enter the name, and then press the

button.

button.

9 Ensure that Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then press the
button.
10 Press the
button until the desired number is highlighted, press the
button to select the speed dial numbers, and then press the
button.
11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
12 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
Yes, and then press the
button.

button to select

13 To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
14 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Editing Group Dial
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a
new number to the selected group.

314

1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

Faxing

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
6 Press the
button until the group dial number that you want to edit is
highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 To change the group dial name:
a

Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the

button.

b

Enter a new name, and then press the

c

Press the
button until Apply settings is highlighted, and
then press the
button.

d

Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
select Yes, and then press the
button.

button.

button to

8 To change the speed dial number:
a

Press the
press the

button until Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then
button.

b

Press the
button until the speed dial number that you want to edit
is highlighted, and then press the
button to select or deselect the
speed dial number. Press the
button.

c

Press the
button until Apply settings is highlighted, and
then press the
button.

d

Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
select Yes, and then press the
button.

button to

9 To delete the group dial:
(Backspace) button.

a

Press the

b

Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
select Yes, and then press the
button.

button to

NOTE: When you delete the last speed dial in a group, the group itself is not
deleted.

10 If you want to edit another group dial number or enter a new group dial
number, repeat steps 5 to 9.
Faxing

315

11 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)
You can use group dialing for broadcasting or delayed transmissions.
Follow the procedure of the desired operation (For Delayed transmission, see
"Specifying the Fax Settings" on page 290).
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the
procedure to complete the desired operation.
Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic
Document Feeder or on the document glass into the memory. The printer
dials each of the numbers included in the group.

Printing an Address Book List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a speed dial list.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Address Book is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
A list of your speed dial entries is printed.

Other Ways to Fax
Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure
Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the
printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will get
saved in the memory. When the mode turns off, any faxes stored will be
printed.
NOTE: Before operation, ensure that Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.

316

Faxing

To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
press the

button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Press the
press the

button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Ensure that Secure Receive Set is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Press the
button.

button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the

NOTE: The factory-default password is 0000.
8 To return to the standby mode, press the

(Menu) button.

When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it
into memory and the Job Status screen displays "Secure Receive"
to let you know that there is a fax stored.
NOTE: If you change the password while Secure Receive Set is

Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the
button until Change
Password is highlighted, and then press the
button. Enter the new
password, and then press the
button.

To print received documents:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button until Job Status is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
3 Press the
press the

button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then
button.

4 Enter the password, and then press the

button.

The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:

Faxing

317

1 Access the Secure Receive Set menu by following steps 1 to 6 in
"To turn the secure receiving mode on:".
2 Press the
button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the
button.
3 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Using an Answering Machine

To the
wall jack

Printer

Line Telephone Answering Device

Phone

You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of
your printer as shown above.
•

Set your printer to the Ans/FAX Mode and set Auto Rec Ans/FAX
to specify the time for the TAD.

•

When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if
fax tones are received and then starts receiving the fax.

•

If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Fax
after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time.

•

If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call
if you
Set On Hook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote
machine), and then press the
(Start) button and hang up the receiver.
OR
Press the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.

318

Faxing

Using a Computer Modem

Line
Printer
To the
internet

Telephone Answering Device

Phone

Computer

If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet
connection, connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer
with the TAD as shown above.
•

Set your printer to the Ans/FAX Mode and set Auto Rec. Ans/FAX
to specify the time for the TAD.

•

Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.

•

Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a
fax.

•

Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax
application to fax via the computer modem.

Printing a Report
The following reports may be useful when using fax:
Address Book

This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer
as Address Book information.
Fax Activity

This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Protocol Monitor

This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Procedures:
Faxing

319

1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until the report or list you want to print is
highlighted, and then press the
button.
The selected report or list is printed.

Changing Setting Options
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the
button until Fax Defaults is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Press the
or
button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter
the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the

320

Faxing

(Back) button.

Know Your Printer

321

322

19

Understanding the Tool Box Menus
The Tool Box allows you to view or specify the system settings. You can also
diagnose the system settings by using the Tool Box.

The Tool Box consists of the Printer Settings Report, Printer Maintenance,
and Diagnosis tabs.
NOTE: The Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings
on ToolBox when Panel Lock is set on the printer. In this case, enter the password
you specified, and click OK to apply the settings.
NOTE: For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer Software
(Windows Only)" on page 409.

Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Printer Information, Menu
Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, Defaults Settings, and Fax
Settings pages.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Printer Information
Purpose:
To display the information of your printer.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number

Displays Dell’s service tag number.

Express Service Code

Displays the express service code of the printer.

Printer Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the printer.

Printer Type

Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is
displayed normally.

Asset Tag Number

Displays the asset tag of the printer.

Memory Capacity

Displays the memory capacity.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

323

Processor Speed

Displays the processing speed.

Firmware Version

Displays the version of the controller.

Network Firmware Version

Displays the NIC version.

MCU Firmware Version

Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit
(MCU) firmware.

Printing Speed (Color)

Displays the speed for color printing.

Printing Speed
(Monochrome)

Displays the speed for monochrome printing.

Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of your printer.
Values:
System Settings

324

Sleep

Displays the time taken by the
printer before it enters Sleep mode
after it finishes a job.

Deep Sleep

Displays the time taken by the
printer before it enters Deep Sleep
mode after it goes into Sleep
mode.

Auto Reset

Displays the time taken by the
printer before it automatically
resets the settings for Copy, Scan,
or Fax on the operator panel to the
defaults when no additional
settings are made.

Panel Select Tone

Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when the operator
panel input is correct. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.

Panel Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when the operator
panel input is incorrect. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Job Tone

Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when a job is
complete. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.

Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when a problem
occurs. Off indicates that the tone
is disabled.

Out of Paper Tone

Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when the printer
runs out of paper. Off indicates
that the tone is disabled.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted 5 seconds before
the printer performs auto clear.
Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.

All Tones

Displays the volume of all the alert
tones. Off indicates that all the
tones are disabled.

Job Time-Out

Displays the amount of time that
the printer waits for data to arrive
from the computer.

Fault Time-Out

Displays the time taken by the
printer before it cancels jobs that
stop abnormally.

Panel Language

Displays the language used on the
operator panel.

Auto Log Print*1

Displays whether to automatically
print a job history report after
every 20 jobs.

mm/inch

Displays the measurement unit
used after the numeric value on
the operator panel.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

325

Date & Time

Paper Density

Adjust BTR

326

Date Format

Displays the default date format.

Time Format

Displays the default time format;
24H or 12H.

Time Zone

Displays the default time zone.

Set Date

Displays the date setting.

Set Time

Displays the time setting.

Plain

Displays the paper density of plain
paper.

Label

Displays the paper density of
labels.

Plain

Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for plain paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for thick plain paper.

Recycled

Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for recycled paper.

Covers

Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for cover paper.

Coated

Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for coated paper.

Envelope

Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for envelopes.

Label

Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for labels.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Adjust Fuser

Plain

Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for plain paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for thick plain paper.

Recycled

Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for recycled paper.

Covers

Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for cover paper.

Coated

Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for coated paper.

Envelope

Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for envelopes.

Label

Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for labels.

Auto Registration Displays whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Adjustment
Adjust Altitude

Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

Non-Dell Toner

Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

BTR Refresh
Mode

Displays whether to execute counter measures for
curling/separating discharge of the paper.

Web Link
Customization

Select
Displays a link used for ordering consumables.
Reorder URL

*1

Regular

Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna).

Premier

Displays the premier web address
(http://premier.dell.com).

If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.

Reports
Purpose:
To print the settings and history information of your printer.
The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings. The
default is A4 or Letter.
Values:

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

327

System Settings

Click to print a detailed list of the system settings.

Panel Settings

Click to print a detailed list of the panel settings.

Job History

Click to print the completed jobs history.

Error History

Click to print the error history.

Demo Page

Click to print the Demo Page.

Address Book List

Click to print the list of Personal Address, Fax Group,
and E-mail Group stored as Address Book.

TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol.
Values:
IP Address Mode

Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.

IP Address

Displays the IP address of your printer.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address.

Tray Settings
Purpose:
To display the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF).
Values:
Paper Type

Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.

Paper Size

Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.

Custom Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the
MPF.

328

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Custom Size - X

Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the
MPF.

Display Popup

Displays whether to use a popup menu that prompts
the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the
paper is loaded in the MPF.

Defaults Settings
Purpose:
To display the default scan, fax, and copy settings of the printer.
Values:
Scan
Defaults

Scan To
Network

Displays whether to store scanned image on a network
server or on a computer.

File Format

Displays the file format to save the scanned image.

Color

Displays whether to scan in color or in black and
white.

Resolution

Displays the default scan resolution.

Document
Size

Displays the default document size.

Lighter/Dark Displays the default scan density level.
er
Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto
Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the
original to enhance text on the scanned image.

Margin
Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin
Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin
Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

Image
Displays the image compression level.
Compression
Max E-Mail
Size

Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

329

Fax Defaults Resolution

Displays the resolution level to be used for fax
transmission.

Lighter/Dark Displays the default density level to be used for fax
er
transmission.
Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.
Copy
Defaults

Color

Displays whether to make copies in color or in black
and white.

Reduce/Enlar Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
ge
Original Type Displays the default document type.
Document
Size

Displays the default document size.

Lighter/Dark Displays the default copy density level.
er
Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto
Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the
original to enhance text on the copy.

Color
Balance
(Red)

Displays the color balance level of red.

Color
Balance
(Green)

Displays the color balance level of green.

Color
Balance
(Blue)

Displays the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance Displays the gray balance level.
Multiple-Up Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up feature.

330

Collated

Displays whether to sort the copy job.

Margin
Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin
Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin
Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To display the basic fax settings.
Values:
Receive Mode

Displays the fax receiving mode.

Auto Rec Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the
fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.

Auto Rec Fax/Tel

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the
fax receive mode after the external telephone receives
an incoming call.

Auto Rec Ans/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the
fax receive mode after the external answering machine
receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor

Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly
monitors a transmission through the internal speaker
until a connection is made.

Ring Tone Volume

Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates
that an incoming call is a telephone call through the
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Displays the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Displays the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Displays the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts

Displays the number of redial attempts.

Redial Delay

Displays the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup

Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted
numbers.

Remote Receive

Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote
receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone

Displays the remote receive code to start Remote
Receive.

Fax Header

Displays whether to print the information of sender on
the header of faxes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

331

Fax Header Name

Displays the name of sender to be printed on the
header of faxes.

Fax Number

Displays the fax number to be printed on the header
of faxes.

Fax Cover Page

Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) setting.

Sent Fax Fwd

Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a
specified destination.

Fax Fwd Number

Displays the fax number of the destination to which
incoming faxes are to be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials
before any auto dial number is started.

Discard Size

Displays whether to discard text or images at the
bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit
onto the output paper.

ECM

Displays whether to enable the Error Correction Mode
(ECM).

Modem Speed

Displays the fax modem speed when a fax
transmission or reception error occurs.

Fax Activity

Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity
report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.

Fax Transmit

Displays whether to print a transmission report after
every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Displays whether to print a transmission report after
every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only
when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol

Displays whether to print a protocol monitor report
after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.

Country

Displays the country where the printer is used.

332

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the System Settings, Date & Time,
Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust Fuser, Registration Adjustment, Adjust
Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, BTR Refresh Mode, Web Link
Customization, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, EWS, Scan Defaults, Fax
Defaults, Copy Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the power saving mode, auto clear time, warning tones, time-out
time, operator panel language settings, job log auto print, and mm/inch
setting.
Values:
Power Saver
Timer

Sleep*1

5 minutes*
5– 30 minutes

Deep Sleep

6 minutes*
1–6 minutes

Auto Reset

45 seconds*
1 minute
2 minutes

Specifies the time taken by
the printer before it enters
Sleep mode after it finishes
a job.
Specifies the time taken by
the printer before it enters
Deep Sleep mode after it
goes into Sleep mode.

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it
automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax
on the operator panel to the defaults when no
additional settings are made.

3 minutes
4 minutes
Alert Tone

Panel Select
Tone

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator
panel input is correct.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume
when the operator panel input is correct.

Medium
High

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

333

Panel Alert
Tone

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator
panel input is incorrect.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume
when the operator panel input is
incorrect.

Medium
High
Job Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a job is
complete.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume
when a job is complete.

Medium*
High
Alert Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a problem
occurs.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume
when a problem occurs.

Medium*
High
Out of Paper Off
Tone
Low
Medium*

Does not emit a tone when the printer
runs out of paper.
Emits a tone at the specified volume
when the printer runs out of paper.

High
Auto Clear
Alert Tone

Off*

Does not emit a tone before the printer
performs auto clear.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume 5
seconds before the printer performs auto
clear.

Medium
High
All Tones

Off

Disables all the alert tones.

Low

Specifies the volume of all the alert tones
at once.

Medium
High

334

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Job TimeOut

Fault TimeOut

Panel
Language

0

Disables the job time-out.

30 seconds*
5–300
seconds

Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for
data to arrive from the computer. The print job is
cancelled if it times out.

0

Disables the fault time-out.

60 seconds*
3–300
seconds

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels
jobs that stop abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it
times out.

English*

Specifies the language to be used on the operator panel.

Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Nederlands
Dansk
Norsk
Svenska

Auto Log
Print*2

Off*

Does not automatically print a job history report.

On

Automatically prints a job history report after every 20
jobs.

mm/inch*3

millimeter
(mm)

Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the
numeric value on the operator panel.

inch (")
Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button
settings
to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

335

*1

Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the Sleep mode five minutes after it finishes a job.
This uses less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your
printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this
keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value
between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance
between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the Sleep mode when it
receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode
by pressing any button on the operator panel.

*2

If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.

*3

The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Date & Time
Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:
Date Format

Specifies the date format; yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or
dd/mm/yy.

Time Format

Specifies the time format; 24H or 12H.

Time Zone

Specifies the time zone.

Set Date

Specifies the current date.

Set Time

Specifies the current time.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain

Normal*

Specifies the paper density of plain paper.

Light

336

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Label

Normal*

Specifies the paper density of labels.

Light
Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Adjust BTR
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller
(BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive
values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you
see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white
spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

0*
-3 – +3

Plain Thick

0*
-3 – +3

Recycled

0*
-3 – +3

Covers

0*
-3 – +3

Coated

0*
-3 – +3

Envelope

0*
-3 – +3

Label

0*
-3 – +3

Apply New
Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New Settings
button to apply the changes.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus

337

Adjust Fuser
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To
lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When
the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

0*
-3 – +3

Plain Thick

0*
-3 – +3

Recycled

0*
-3 – +3

Covers

0*
-3 – +3

Coated

0*
-3 – +3

Envelope

0*
-3 – +3

Label

0*
-3 – +3

Apply New
Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New Settings
button to apply the changes.

Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To set Color Registration Adjustment (individual yellow, magenta, cyan
correction) settings. When Auto Registration Adjustment is set to On, the
printer prints the color registration chart and adjusts the color registration by
338

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

using the chart. Color registration adjustment need to be made during the
initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to a different
location.
Values:
Auto Registration On*
Adjustment
Off
*1

Does not automatically adjust color registration.
Click Start to automatically correct color
registration.

Auto Correct

Print Color Regi Chart*1,*2
Color
Registration
Adjustment 1
(Lateral)*1

Automatically adjusts color registration.

Yellow

Click Start to print a color registration chart.
0*
-5–+5

Magenta

0*

Specifies lateral (perpendicular to
paper feed direction) color
adjustment values individually.

-5–+5
Cyan

0*
-5–+5

Color
Registration
Adjustment 2
(Process)*1

LY(Left
Yellow)

0*

LM(Left
Magenta)

0*

LC(Left
Cyan)

0*

RY(Right
Yellow)

0*

RM(Right
Magenta)

0*

RC(Right
Cyan)

0*

Apply New Settings

-5–+5

Specifies process (paper feed
direction) color adjustment values
individually.

-5–+5
-5–+5
-5–+5
-5–+5
-5–+5
After you complete the settings, press the Apply
New Settings button to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

339

*1

This item is available only when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.

*2

The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan
lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next to the line that is
perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color
registration is not needed. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify
the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustment.

Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with
barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of
the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality,
incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Values:
0 meter*
1000 meters

Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer
is installed.

2000 meters
3000 meters
Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters or Address
Book data. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu
parameters or data are reset to their default values.
For details, see "Resetting Defaults" on page 357.
Values:
System Section

340

Click to initialize the system parameters.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

User Fax Section

Click to initialize the fax number entries in the
Address Book.

User Scan Section

Click to initialize the e-mail and server address entries
in the Address Book.

Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features
unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer. Dell
recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not
provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or
components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart
the printer.
Values:
Non-Dell
Toner

Off*

Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

On

Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

BTR Refresh Mode
Purpose:
To execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Values:

BTR Refresh Off*
Mode
On
Apply New Settings

Does not automatically execute counter measures for
curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Automatically executes counter measures for
curling/separating discharge of the paper.
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus

341

Web Link Customization
Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables.
Values:
Select Reorder URL

Select the Regular or Premier URL.

Regular*

Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna).

Premier

Displays the premier web address
(http://premier.dell.com).

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Values:
IP Address
Mode

AutoIP*

Automatically sets the IP address.

BOOTP

Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.

RARP

Uses RARP to set the IP address.

DHCP

Uses DHCP to set the IP address.

Panel

Manually sets the IP address.

IP Address

Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.

Subnet Mask

Manually sets the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Manually sets the gateway address.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button
settings
to apply the changes.

342

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Tray Settings
Purpose:
To specify the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF).
Values:
Paper Type

Plain*

Specifies the type of paper loaded in the MPF.

Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain Side 2
Plain Thick
Side 2
Covers Side 2
Coated
Side 2
Recycled
Side 2

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

343

Paper Size

A4*1

Specifies the size of paper loaded in the MPF.

A5
B5
Letter*1
Folio
Legal
Executive
Envelope
#10
Monarch
Monarch
Landscape
DL
DL
Landscape
C5
Custom Size
Custom Size 297
-Y
mm*/11.7
inch*

Specifies the length of custom size paper.

127–355
mm/5.0–14.0
inch
Custom Size 210 mm*/8.3 Specifies the width of custom size paper.
-X
inch*
77–215
mm/3.0–8.5
inch
Display
Popup

On*

Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in
the MPF.

Off

Does not display a popup menu.

Apply New Settings

344

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

*1

The default for Paper Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.

EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool)
Purpose:
To display the server settings of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, this setting cannot be
displayed.
Values:
Print Server Settings

Click Display to display the server settings for the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Display of
EWS

On*

Turns on the display of the server settings for the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Off

Turns off the display of the server settings for the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Values:
Scan To
Network

Computer
(Network)*

Stores the scanned image on a computer using the
Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.

Server (FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP
protocol.
File Format

TIFF

Saves the scanned image in TIFF.

PDF*

Saves the scanned image in PDF.

JPEG

Saves the scanned image in JPEG.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

345

Color

Black &
White

Scans in black and white mode.

GrayScale

Scan in grayscale mode.

Color*

Scans in color mode.

Color(Photo) Scans in color mode. This is suitable for photographic
images.
Resolution

Document
Size

200*

Scans an image at 200dpi.

300

Scans an image at 300dpi.

400

Scans an image at 400dpi.

600

Scans an image at 600dpi.

*1

A4

Sets the document size to A4.

A5

Sets the document size to A5.

B5
Letter

Sets the document size to B5.
*1

Folio

Sets the document size to Folio.

Legal

Sets the document size to Legal.

Executive

Sets the document size to Executive.

Lighter/Dark Lighter 2
er
Lighter 1

Sharpness

Sets the document size to Letter.

Makes the scanned image lighter than the original.
Works well with dark print.

Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker 1
Darker 2

Makes the scanned image darker than the original.
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Softest

Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Softer
Normal*

Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer
than the original.

Sharper

Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Sharpest
Auto
Exposure

346

On*

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance
text on the scanned image.

Off

Does not suppress the background.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Margin
Top/Bottom

2 mm*/0.1
inch*

Specifies the value of the top and bottom margins.

0–50
mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Margin
Left/Right

2 mm*/0.1
inch*

Specifies the value of the left and right margins.

0–50
mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Margin
Middle

0 mm*/0.0
inch*

Specifies the value of the middle margin.

0–50
mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Image
High
Compression Medium*
Low

Sets the image compression level to High.
Sets the image compression level to Medium.
Sets the image compression level to Low.

Max E-Mail Size

Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent,
within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The
default is 2048 K bytes.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

*1

The default for Document Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
Values:

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

347

Resolution

Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or
thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix
printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine
detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the Super Fine
resolution.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic
images.

Lighter/Dark Lighter 2
er
Lighter 1

Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well
with dark print.

Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker 1

Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well
with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker 2
Delayed Start 21:00*
00:00–23:59
Apply New Settings

Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax
at a specified time.
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button
settings
to apply the changes.

Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:
Color

348

Black &
White

Prints in black and white mode.

Color*

Prints in color mode.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Reduce/
Enlarge

mm series Custom

Sets the default reduction/enlargement
ratio to the custom size.

200%

Sets the default enlargement ratio when
you set the default measurement unit to
millimeter.

A5A4
(141%)
A5B5
(122%)
100%

Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a
copied image.

B5A5
(81%)

Sets the default reduction ratio when you
set the default measurement unit to
millimeter.

A4A5
(70%)
50%
inch series 200%

Sets the default enlargement ratio when
Statement you set the default measurement unit to
Legal (154%) inch.
Statement
Letter (129%)
100%

Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a
copied image.

LegalLetter Sets the default reduction ratio when you
(78%)
set the default measurement unit to inch.
Ledger
Letter (64%)
50%
Custom
Reduce/
Enlarge

100%*
25–400%

Reduces or enlarges the image to the
custom size when Reduce/Enlarge is set
to Custom.

Original Type

Text

Suitable for documents with text.

Text &
Photo*

Suitable for documents with both text
and photos/gray tones.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

349

Document
Size

A4*1

Sets the document size to A4.

A5

Sets the document size to A5.

B5
Letter

Lighter/Dark
er

Sharpness

Sets the document size to B5.
*1

Sets the document size to Letter.

Folio

Sets the document size to Folio.

Legal

Sets the document size to Legal.

Executive

Sets the document size to Executive.

Lighter 2

Makes the copy lighter than the original.
Works well with dark print.

Lighter 1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed
documents.

Darker 1
Darker 2

Makes the copy darker than the original.
Works well with light print or faint pencil
markings.

Softest

Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softer
Normal*

Does not make the copy sharper or softer
than the original.

Sharper

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharpest
Auto
Exposure

On*

Suppresses the background of the original
to enhance text on the copy.

Off

Does not suppress the background.

Color
Balance
(Red)

0*

Sets the color balance level of red.

Color
Balance
(Green)

0*

Color
Balance
(Blue)

0*

Gray Balance

0*

-2– 2
Sets the color balance level of green.

-2– 2
Sets the color balance level of blue.

-2– 2
Sets the gray balance level.

-2– 2

350

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Multiple-Up

Collated

Margin
Top/Bottom

Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages
to fit onto one sheet of paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of
paper in the original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one
sheet of paper in the size specified in
Reduce/Enlarge.

Uncollated*

Does not sort the copy job.

Collated

Sorts the copy job.

Auto

Automatically determines which output
mode for the copy job.

4 mm*/0.2
inch*

Specifies the value of the top and bottom
margins.

0-50 mm/0.02.0 inch
Margin
Left/Right

4 mm*/0.2
inch*

Specifies the value of the left and right
margins.

0-50 mm/0.02.0 inch
Margin
Middle

0 mm*/0.0
inch*

Specifies the value of the middle margin.

0-50 mm/0.02.0 inch
Apply New Settings

*1

After you complete the settings, press the
Apply New Settings button to apply the
changes.

The default for Document Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic fax settings.
Values:

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

351

Receive
Mode

Telephone

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive
a fax by picking up the handset of the external
telephone, pressing the remote receive code, and then
pressing
.

Fax*

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fa When the printer receives an incoming fax, the
x
external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto
Rec Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that
the call is a telephone call.
Ans
The printer can share a telephone line with an
Machine/Fax answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial
transmission in your country (such as Germany,
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and
Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
DRPD

Auto Rec Fax 0*
0–255
Auto Rec
Fax/Tel

6*

Auto Rec
Ans/Fax

21*

352

0–255

0–255

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone
company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
specific ring pattern.
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
receive mode after receiving an incoming call.
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
receive mode after the external telephone receives an
incoming call.
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
receive mode after the external answering machine
receives an incoming call.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Line Monitor Off
Low
Medium*
High
Ring Tone
Volume

Tone/Pulse

Specifies the volume of the line monitor, which
audibly monitors a transmission through the internal
speaker until a connection is made.

Off

Turns off the volume of the ring tone.

Low
High*

Specifies the volume of the ring tone, which indicates
that an incoming call is a telephone call through the
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.

PSTN*

Sets the line type to PSTN.

PBX

Sets the line type to PBX.

Tone*

Sets the dialing type to Tone.

Medium
Line Type

Turns off the volume of the line monitor.

Pulse(10PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).
)
Pulse(20PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).
)
Resend Delay 8*

Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

3–255
Redial
Attempts

3*
0–9

Redial Delay 1*

Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when
the destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the
printer will not redial.
Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

1–15
Junk Fax
Setup

Off*

Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

On

Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered
in the Phone Book.

Remote
Receive

Off*

Disables the remote receive feature.

On

Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the
external telephone after picking up the handset of the
telephone.

Remote Rcv
Tone

00*

Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start
Remote Receive.

00–99

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

353

Fax Header

On*

Prints the information of sender on the header of
faxes.

Off

Does not print the information of sender on the
header of faxes.

Fax Header Name

Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of
faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.

Fax Number

Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the
header of faxes.

Fax Cover
Page

Off*

Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

On

Attaches a cover page to faxes.

DRPD
Pattern

Pattern 4*

Provides a separate number for faxing with a
distinctive ring pattern.

Pattern 1–7

Sent Fax Fwd Off*

Does not forward incoming faxes.

Forward

Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified
destination.

Print and
Forward

Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified
destination and prints all forwarded incoming faxes.

Fax Fwd Number

Specifies the fax number of the destination to which
incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Off*

Does not set a prefix dial number.

On

Sets a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This
number dials before any auto dial number is started. It
is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch
Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size

Off

Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without
discarding it.

On

Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.

Auto
Reduction*

Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the
output paper.

On*

Enables the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote
machines must also support the ECM.

Off

Disables the ECM.

ECM

354

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Modem
Speed

2.4
4.8

Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax
transmission or reception error occurs.

9.6
14.4
33.6*
Fax Activity

Auto Print*

Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.

No Auto
Print

Does not automatically print a fax activity report.

Fax Transmit Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax
transmission.

Fax
Broadcast

Print On
Error*

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Always

Prints a transmission report after every fax
transmission.

Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax
transmission to multiple destinations.
Print On
Error

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Always* Prints a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations.
Fax Protocol

Print
Disable*

Does not print a protocol monitor report.

Print On
Error

Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error
occurs.

Print Always

Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission.

Country

Selects the country where the printer is used.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button
settings
to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

355

Diagnosis
The Diagnosis tab contains the Chart Print, Environment Sensor Info,
Clean Developer, and Refresh Mode pages.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Chart Print
Purpose:
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosing your printer.
Values:
Pitch Configuration Chart

Click to print full halftone pages for yellow, magenta,
cyan, and black. Also outputs pages to check the pitch.

Ghost Configuration Chart Click to print a chart to check for ghost printing.
4 Colors Configuration
Chart

Click to print bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and
black with varying density.

MQ Chart

Click to print charts to check for the binding.

Alignment Chart

Click to print a chart, and then check for proper
alignment of the print image on the paper.

PHD Refresh Configuration Click to print a chart to check the light fatigue of the
Chart
PHD unit.

Environment Sensor Info
Purpose:
To output the internal environment sensor information of the printer to
Result by pressing the Get Environment Sensor Info button.

Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Values:

356

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Clean Developer

Click Start to stir the toner.

Refresh Mode
Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its
life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
NOTE: Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner.
Values:
Toner Refresh Yellow
Mode
Magenta

Click to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
Click to clean the toner in the magenta toner
cartridge.

Cyan

Click to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

Black

Click to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.

Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters
or data are reset to their default values.
NOTE:
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Tool Box.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the

Select Printer window appears. In this case, click the name of this printer
listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reset Defaults page is displayed.
4 Select the desired option button.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

357

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.

358

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

20

Understanding the Printer Menus

When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of
users, the access to the Admin Menu menus can be limited. This prevents
unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the
default menu settings that has been set by the administrator. However, you
can use select settings for individual print jobs using the printer driver. Print
settings selected from the printer driver have precedence over the default
menu settings selected from the operator panel.

Defaults Settings
Use the Defaults Settings menu to configure the default copy, scan,
and fax settings of the printer.

Copy Defaults
Use the Copy Defaults menus to configure a variety of copy features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Color

Purpose:
To set whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
Values:
Black & White Prints in black and white mode.
Color*

Prints in color mode.

Collated

Purpose:
To sort the copy job.
Values:
Understanding the Printer Menus

359

Uncollated*

Does not sort the copy job.

Collated

Sorts the copy job.

Auto

Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job.

Reduce/Enlarge

Purpose:
To set the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Values:
mm series

200%
A5A4 (141%)
A5B5 (122%)
100%*
B5A5 (81%)
A4A5 (70%)
50%

inch series

200%
StmtLgl (154%)
StmtLtr (129%)
100%*
LglLtr (78%)
LdgrLtr (64%)
50%

360

Understanding the Printer Menus

NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from
25% to 400%, or press to enlarge the zoom ratio or press to reduce the zoom
ratio in 1% intervals.
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or
Manual.
Document Size

Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1

The default for Document Size
varies depending on countryspecific factory default.

Original Type

Purpose:
To select the copy image quality.
Values:
Text

Suitable for documents with text.

Text & Photo*

Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

Understanding the Printer Menus

361

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Values:
Lighter2
Lighter1

Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark
print.

Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print
or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Sharpness

Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal*

Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Softer

Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softest

Auto Exposure

Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:
Off

Does not suppress the background.

On*

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the
copy.

362

Understanding the Printer Menus

Color Balance R

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of red within the range of -2 to +2.
Color Balance G

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of green within the range of -2 to
+2.
Color Balance B

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of blue within the range of -2 to +2.
Gray Balance

Purpose:
To specify the default gray balance level within the range of -2 to +2.
Multiple-Up

Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of
paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size
specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:
Understanding the Printer Menus

363

4 mm*/0.2 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:
4 mm*/0.2 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Margin Middle

Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:
0 mm*/0.0 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Scan Defaults
Use the Scan Defaults menus to configure a variety of scanner features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Scan to Network

Purpose:
To store the scanned image on a network server or on a computer.
Values:

364

Understanding the Printer Menus

Network
(Computer)*

Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message
Block (SMB) protocol.

Network
(Server)

Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.

File Format

Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF*
TIFF
JPEG

Color

Purpose:
To set whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Values:
Black & White Scans in black and white mode.
Color*

Scans in color mode.

Color Button Set

Purpose:
To assign color mode to the color mode switch button.
Values:

Understanding the Printer Menus

365

B&W Button

Color Button

Black & White*

Scans in black and white when Black &
White is selected for a color mode.

Grayscale

Scans in gray scale when Black & White is
selected for a color mode.

Color*

Scans in color when Color is selected for a
color mode.

Color (Photo)

Scans in color (Photo) when Color is
selected for a color mode. This is suitable for
photographic images.

Resolution

Purpose:
To specify the default scan resolution.
Values:
200 x 200 dpi*
300 x 300 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
600 x 600 dpi

Document Size

Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")

366

Understanding the Printer Menus

Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1

The default for Document Size
varies depending on countryspecific factory default.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:
To set the default scan density level.
Values:
Lighter2
Lighter1

Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with
dark print.

Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with
light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Sharpness

Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest

Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal*

Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the
original.

Softer

Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Softest

Auto Exposure

Purpose:

Understanding the Printer Menus

367

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned
image.
Values:
Off

Does not suppress the background.

On*

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the
scanned image.

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:
2 mm*/0.1 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:
2 mm*/0.1 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Margin Middle

Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:

368

Understanding the Printer Menus

0 mm*/0.0 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Image Compression

Purpose:
To specify the image compression level.
Values:
High

Sets the image compression level to High.

Medium*

Sets the image compression level to Medium.

Low

Sets the image compression level to Low.

Max EMail Size

Purpose:
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of
50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default is 2048 K bytes.

Fax Defaults
Use the Fax Defaults menus to configure a variety of fax features.
NOTE: The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under
Country. If Country is not set up, a message Set The Country
Code appears on the display.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Resolution

Purpose:
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
Values:
Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Understanding the Printer Menus

369

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The
Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also
supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest
resolution supported by the receiving device.
Original Type

Purpose:
To select the default document type.
Values:
Text*

Suitable for documents with text.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Values:
Lighter2

Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print
or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Delayed Start

Purpose:

370

Understanding the Printer Menus

This feature enables you to set a specific time for the fax transmission to
start. Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all of the
documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time.
After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is
cleared.
Values:
21:00*/PM9:00* Specify the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a
specified time.
0:00 - 23:59 /
AM/PM1:00 12:59

NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer.

USB Print Defaults
Layout

Purpose:
To automatically enlarge print documents when you print directly from a
USB storage device.
Values:
Auto*

Automatically enlarges print documents to fit on the paper.

Off

Does not enlarge print documents.

Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper
loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

MPF
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Understanding the Printer Menus

371

Values:
Paper Size

A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
Envelope #10 (4.1 x 9.5")
Monarch Env. (3.9 x 7.5")
Monarch Env. L (7.5 x 3.9")
DL Env. (110 x 220 mm)
DL Env. L (220 x 110 mm)
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)
Custom Portrait (Y)
Size

Specifies the
297
mm*/11.7inch* length of the
custom size
127 - 355
paper.
mm/5.0-14.0
inches

Landscape(X) 210 mm*/8.3
inch*
77 - 215
mm/3.0-8.5
inches

372

Understanding the Printer Menus

Specifies the
width of the
custom size
paper.

Paper Type

Plain*
Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain S2
Plain Thick S2
Covers S2
Coated
S2
Recycled S2

Display Popup

*1

Off

Does not display a popup menu.

On*

Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to
set Paper Size and Paper Type when
the paper is loaded in the MPF.

The default for Paper
factory default.

Size varies depending on country-specific

NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes"
on page 196.

Reports/List
Use the Reports/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.

System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the information such as the printer name, service tag, the
status of the printer, consumables, and the network settings.

Panel Settings
Purpose:
Understanding the Printer Menus

373

To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.

Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been
processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.

Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.

Color Test Page
Purpose:
To print a page for testing colors.

Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.

Address Book
Purpose:
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.

Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.

Admin Menu
Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel
Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the password you specified,
and press the

374

button.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial
settings.
Speed Dial

Purpose:
To store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
See also:
"Storing a Number for Speed Dialing" on page 311.
Group Dial

Purpose:
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial
code. Up to 6 group dial codes can be registered.
See also:
"Setting Group Dial" on page 314.

Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to
the printer through the wired or wireless network.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Ethernet

Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
Auto*

Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.

10BASE-T Half Uses 10base-T half-duplex.
10BASE-T Full Uses 10base-T full-duplex.

Understanding the Printer Menus

375

100BASE-TX
Half

Uses 100base-TX half-duplex.

100BASE-TX
Full

Uses 100base-TX full-duplex.

NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wired
network.
Status (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)

Purpose:
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. No changes can be
made on the operator panel to improve the status of the wireless connection.
Values:
Good

Indicates good signal strength.

Acceptable

Indicates marginal signal strength.

Low

Indicates insufficient signal strength.

No Reception Indicates that no signal is received.

NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless
network.
Wireless Setup (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)

Purpose:
To configure the wireless network interface.
Values:

376

Understanding the Printer Menus

Manual
Setup

Enter
Network
(SSID)

Specify a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32
alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Infrastruct Select when you configure the wireless setting through the
ure
access point such as a wireless router.
No
Security

Specify No Security to configure the wireless
setting without specifying a security method from
WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA-PSK-AES.

WEP
(64Bit)

Specify the WEP 64bit Key to use through the
wireless network. Up to 10 hexadecimal characters
can be entered.
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP
Key
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and
WEP Key 4.

WEP
Specify the WEP 128bit Key to use through the
(128Bit) wireless network. Up to 26 hexadecimal characters
can be entered.
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP
Key
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and
WEP Key 4.

Understanding the Printer Menus

377

WPAPSKTKIP

Select to configure the wireless setting with the
security method of WPA-PSK-TKIP.
Pass
Phrase
Entry

Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric
characters from 8 to 63 only when
WPA-PSK-TKIP is selected for
Encryption.

WPA2Select to configure the wireless setting with the
PSK-AES security method of WPA2-PSK-AES.
Pass
Phrase
Entry
Ad-hoc

Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric
characters from 8 to 63 only when
WPA-PSK-AES is selected for
Encryption.

Select to configure the wireless setting without the access
point such as a wireless router.
No
Security

Specify No Security to configure the wireless
setting without specifying the security method
from WEP.

WEP
(64Bit)

Specify the WEP 64bit Key to use through the
wireless network. Up to 10 hexadecimal characters
can be entered.
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP
Key
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and
WEP Key 4.

WEP
Specify the WEP 128bit Key to use through the
(128Bit) wireless network. Up to 26 hexadecimal characters
can be entered.
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP
Key
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and
WEP Key 4.

378

Understanding the Printer Menus

WPS

Push
Button
Control

PBC
Start

No*

Disables the security method of WPSPBC.

Yes

Configures the wireless setting with the
security method of WPS-PBC.

PIN Code Start
Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code
Configur assigned automatically by the printer.
ation
Print
PIN
Code

Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when you enter
the PIN code to your computer.

NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless
network.
Reset Wireless (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)

Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and
rebooting the printer, all wireless network settings are reset to their default
values.
No*

Does not reset the wireless setting.

Yes

Resets the wireless setting.

NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless
network.
TCP/IP

Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings. The change becomes effective after the printer
is turned off and then on.
Values:
IP
Dual Stack*
Mode IPv4 Mode

Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.

Understanding the Printer Menus

379

IPv4

Get IP
Address

AutoIP*

Automatically sets the IP address.

BOOTP

Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.

RARP

Uses RARP to set the IP address.

DHCP

Uses DHCP to set the IP address.

Panel

Enables the IP address entered on the operator
panel.

IP Address

Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.

Subnet Mask

Manually sets the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Manually sets the gateway address.

Protocol

Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the
printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
LPD
Port9100

Disable

Disables the LPD port.

Enable*

Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.

Disable

Disables the Port9100 port.

Enable*

Enables the Port9100 port.

Disable

Disables the WSD port.

Enable*

Enables the WSD port.

Disable

Disables the SNMP UDP port.

Enable*

Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) UDP port.

E-Mail Alerts

Disable

Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.

Enable*

Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.

EWS

Disable

Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool embedded in the printer.

Enable*

Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool embedded in the printer.

WSD
SNMP

380

Understanding the Printer Menus

LLTD

Disable

Disables the LLTD.

Enable*

Enables the LLTD.

Bonjour (mDNS) Disable

Disables the Bonjour (mDNS).

Enable*

Enables the Bonjour (mDNS).

Initialize NVM

Purpose:
To initialize wired network data stored in NVM (non-volatile memory). After
executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings
are reset to their default values.
No*

Does not initialize the wired network data stored in NVM.

Yes

Initializes the wired network data stored in NVM.

Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Receive Mode

Purpose:
To select the default fax receiving mode.
Values:
TEL Mode

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by
picking up the handset of the external telephone, pressing the
remote receive code, and then pressing .

FAX Mode

Automatically receives faxes.

TEL/FAX
Mode

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone
rings for the time specified in Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then
the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a
fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the
call is a telephone call.

Understanding the Printer Menus

381

Ans/FAX Mode The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine.
In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the
line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication is using
serial transmission in your country (such as Germany, Sweden,
Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), this
mode is not supported.
DRPD Mode

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)
option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone
company has provided a separate number for faxing with a
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
specific ring pattern.

Auto Rec Fax

Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
receiving an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0
to 255 seconds. The default is 0 second.
Auto Rec TEL/FAX

Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
the external telephone receives an incoming call. The interval can be
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 6 seconds.
Auto Rec Ans/FAX

Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
the external answering machine receives an incoming call. The interval can be
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 21 seconds.
Line Monitor

Purpose:
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Values:
382

Understanding the Printer Menus

Off

Turns off the volume of the line monitor.

Low

Sets the volume of the line monitor.

Medium*
High

Ring Tone Volume

Purpose:
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.
Values:

Off

Turns off the volume of the ring tone.

Low

Sets the volume of the ring tone.

Medium
High*

Line Type

Purpose:
To select the line type.
Values:
PSTN*

Sets the line type to PSTN.

PBX

Sets the line type to PBX.

Tone/Pulse

Purpose:
To select the dialing type.
Values:

Understanding the Printer Menus

383

Tone*

Sets the dialing type to Tone.

Pulse(10PPS)

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).

Pulse(20PPS)

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).

Resend Delay

Purpose:
To specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to
255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.
Redial Attempts

Purpose:
To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax
number is busy, within the range of 0 to 9. If you enter 0, the printer will not
redial. The default is 3.
Redial Delay

Purpose:
To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15
minutes. The default is 1 minute.
Junk Fax Setup

Purpose:
To reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the
fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.
Off*

Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

On

Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.
Remote Receive

Purpose:

384

Understanding the Printer Menus

To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone
after picking up the handset of the telephone.
Values:
Off*

Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the
external telephone.

On

Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external
telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone

Purpose:
To specify the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header

Purpose:
To print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Values:
Off

Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

On*

Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Company Name

Purpose:
To set the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Fax Number

Purpose:
To set the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page

Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Understanding the Printer Menus

385

Values:
Off*

Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

On

Attaches a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Values:

386

Understanding the Printer Menus

Pattern 1-7

DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD
Patterns are specified by your telephone company. The patterns
provided with your printer are shown below:

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

Pattern 5

Pattern 6

Pattern 7
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to
use this service. For example, Pattern 7 is the New Zealand
FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400ms, stops for
800ms, rings for 400ms and stops for 1400ms. This pattern is
repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to
Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.

Understanding the Printer Menus

387

Forward Settings

Purpose:
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Values:
Off*

Does not forward incoming faxes.

Forward Only

Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Print and
Forward

Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.

Fax Fwd Number

Purpose:
To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be
forwarded.
Prefix Dial

Purpose:
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.
Values:
Off*

Does not set a prefix dial number.

On

Sets a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Purpose:
To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any
auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic
Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size

Purpose:

388

Understanding the Printer Menus

To set whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the
entire page does not fit onto the output paper.
Values:
Off*

Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.

On

Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.

Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.

ECM

Purpose:
To set whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the
ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Values:
Off

Disable the ECM.

On*

Enables the ECM.

Modem Speed

Purpose:
To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error
occurs. Values:
2.4 Kbps
4.8 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
33.6 Kbps*

Fax Activity

Purpose:

Understanding the Printer Menus

389

To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Values:
Auto Print*

Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming
and outgoing fax communications.

No Auto Print

Does not automatically print a fax activity report.

Fax Transmit

Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or
only when an error occurs.
Values:
Print Always

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error* Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.

Fax Broadcast

Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to
multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Values:
Print Always*

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to
multiple destinations.

Protocol Monitor

Purpose:

390

Understanding the Printer Menus

To set whether to print a protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the
cause of a communication problem.
Values:
Print Always

Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable*

Does not print a protocol monitor report after a fax transmission.

Country

Purpose:
To select the country where the printer is used.

System Settings
Use the System Settings menu to configure to configure a variety of
printer features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Power Saver Timer

Purpose:
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.
Options:
Mode 1

5min*
5–30min

Mode 2

6min*
1–6min

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it
enters the power saver timer mode 1 after it finishes
a job.
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it
enters the power saver timer mode 2 after it goes into
the power saver mode 1.

Enter 5 in Mode 1 to put the printer in the power saver timer mode five
minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warmup time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with
room lighting and you notice lights flickering.

Understanding the Printer Menus

391

Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances,
this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a
value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a
balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver
timer mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the
printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
Auto Reset

Purpose:
To automatically reset the settings for COPY, SCAN, or FAX to the defaults
and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the
specified time.
Values:
45sec*
1min
2min
3min
4min

Fault Time-out

Purpose:
To specify the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop
abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Options:
Off

Disables the fault time-out.

On*

60 sec*
3–300 sec

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it
cancels for jobs that stop abnormally.

Job Time-out

Purpose:
392

Understanding the Printer Menus

To specify the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from
the computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Options:
Off

Disables the job time-out.

On

30 sec*

Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to
5–300 sec arrive from the computer.

Date & Time

Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:
Set Date

Specifies the current date.

Set Time

Specifies the current time.

Date Format*1

YY/MM/DD

Specifies the date format.

MM/DD/YY
DD/MM/YY
Time Format

12H

Specifies the time format.

24H
Time Zone
*1

Specifies the time zone.

The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory
default.

Alert Tone

Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or
when a warning message appears.
Values:

Understanding the Printer Menus

393

Panel Select Tone

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel
input is correct.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the
operator panel input is correct.

Medium
High
Panel Alert Tone

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel
input is incorrect.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the
operator panel input is incorrect.

Medium
High
Auto Clear Alert

Off*

Does not emit a tone before the printer performs
auto clear.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds
before the printer performs auto clear.

Medium
High
Job Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job
is complete.

Medium*
High
Alert Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a
problem occurs.

Medium*
High
Out of Paper

Off

Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out
of paper.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the
printer runs out of paper.

Medium*
High

394

Understanding the Printer Menus

All Tones

Off

Disables all the alert tones.

Low

Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.

Medium*
High

mm/inch

Purpose:
To specify the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the
operator panel.
Values:
Millimeters
(mm)

Specifies the default measurement unit.

Inches (")

NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory

default.

Auto Log Print

Purpose:
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Values:
Off*

Does not automatically print a job history report.

On

Automatically prints a job history report.

NOTE: The job history report can also be printed using the Report List

menu.

NOTE: If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.
Low Toner Alert Msg

Purpose:
Understanding the Printer Menus

395

To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Values:

Off

Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.

On*

Shows the alert message when the toner is low.

Power on Wizard

Purpose:
To perform initial setup for the printer.
Values:

Yes

Performs the initial setup for the printer.

No*

Does not perform the initial setup for the printer.

Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize NVM (non-volatile memory),
configure the plain paper quality adjustment settings, and configure the
security settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
F/W Version

Purpose:
To display the version of the controller.
Service Tag

Purpose:
To display the service tag of the printer.
Express Code

Purpose:
To display the express service code of the printer.
396

Understanding the Printer Menus

Paper Density

Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain

Light
Normal*

Label

Light
Normal*

Adjust BTR

Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller
(BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive
values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you
see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white
spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

0*
-3 – +3

Plain Thick

0*
-3 – +3

Covers

0*

Coated

0*

-3 – +3
-3 – +3
Label

0*
-3 – +3
Understanding the Printer Menus

397

Recycled

0*
-3 – +3

Envelope

0*
-3 – +3

Adjust Fuser

Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To
lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When
the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

0*
-3 – +3

Plain Thick

0*
-3 – +3

Covers

0*
-3 – +3

Coated

0*
-3 – +3

Label

0*
-3 – +3

Recycled

0*
-3 – +3

Envelope

0*
-3 – +3

398

Understanding the Printer Menus

Auto Regi Adjust

Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Values:
Off

Does not automatically adjust color registration.

On*

Automatically adjusts color registration.

Adjust ColorRegi

Purpose:
To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the
printer or when the printer is moved to a different location.
NOTE: This item is available only when Auto Regi Adjust is set to Off.
Clean Developer

Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Yes

Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.

No*

Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.

Toner Refresh

Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its
life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Yellow

Yes

Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the yellow toner
cartridge.
Understanding the Printer Menus

399

Magenta

Cyan

Black

Yes

Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the magenta toner
cartridge.

Yes

Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the cyan toner
cartridge.

Yes

Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the black toner
cartridge.

BTR Refresh

Purpose:
Specify whether to execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge
of the paper.
Values:
Off*

Does not automatically execute counter measures for
curling/separating discharge of the paper.

On

Automatically executes counter measures for curling/separating
discharge of the paper.

Initialize NVM

Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters, Address
Book data for fax, or Address Book data for e-mail. After executing this
function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to
their default values.
Values:

User Fax
Section

400

Yes

Initializes the fax number entries in the Address
Book.

No*

Does not initialize the fax number entries in the
Address Book.

Understanding the Printer Menus

User Scan
Section

Yes

Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in
the Address Book.

No*

Does not initialize the e-mail and server address
entries in the Address Book.

System Section Yes
No*

Initializes the system parameters.
Does not initialize the system parameters.

Non-Dell Toner

Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features
unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer. Dell
recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not
provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or
components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart
the printer.
Values:
Off*

Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

On

Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Adjust Altitude

Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with
barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of
the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality,
incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Values:

Understanding the Printer Menus

401

0m*

Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

1000m
2000m
3000m

Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the
menus. This prevents items from being changed accidentally.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Panel Lock

Purpose:
To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password.
For details see "Panel Lock Function" on page 405.
NOTE: You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Function
Enabled are set to On and Secure Receive Set is set to Disable.
Values:
Panel Lock Set

Disable*

Does not restrict access to Admin Menu with a
password.

Enable

Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.

Change Password 0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to access
Admin Menu.

Function Enabled

Purpose:
To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a
password to use the services, and to set or change the password.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Function Enabled only when
Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Values:
402

Understanding the Printer Menus

Copy

FAX

SCAN

USB-Print

Change Password

On

Enables the Copy service.

Off

Disables the Copy service.

On
(Password)

Enables the Copy service with a black and white
mode, but requires a password.

On (Color
Password)

Enables the Copy service with a color mode, but
requires a password.

On

Enables the Fax service.

Off

Disables the Fax service (the printer will not send
or receive faxes).

On
(Password)

Enables the Fax services, but requires a password
to send faxes (does not require a password to
receive incoming faxes).

On

Enables the Scan service.

Off

Disables the Scan service.

On
(Password)

Enables the Scan service, but requires a password.

On*

Enables the USB-Print service.

Off

Disables the USB-Print service.

On
(Password)

Enables the USB-Print service with a black and
white mode, but requires a password.

On (Color
Password)

Enables the USB-Print service with a color mode,
but requires a password.
Sets or changes the password required to use the
Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services.

Secure Receive

Purpose:
To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes, and to set or
change the password. When Secure Receive Set is set to Enable, the
printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is
entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Secure Receive Set only
when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Understanding the Printer Menus

403

Values:
Secure Receive Set Disable*

Change Password

Does not require a password to print incoming
faxes.

Enable

Requires a password to print incoming faxes.

0000–9999

Sets or changes the password required to print
incoming faxes.

Scan to EMail
Use the Scan to EMail menu to edit the transmission source.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Edit From Field
Disable

Disables editing of the transmission source.

Enable*

Enables editing of the transmission source.

USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB
port.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
USB Port

Purpose:
To enable or disable the USB interface. The change becomes effective after
the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
Enable*

Enables the USB interface.

Disable

Disables the USB interface.

404

Understanding the Printer Menus

Panel Language
Purpose:
To specify the language to be used on the operator panel.
Values:
English*
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska

Panel Lock Function
This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing settings made by the
administrator. However, you can select settings for individual print jobs using
the printer driver.

Enabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
press the

button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then
button.

5 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the

button.

6 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the
button.
Understanding the Printer Menus

405

7 Press the
button.

button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the

NOTE: The factory-default panel password is 0000.
NOTE: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below
allows you to reset the password, but the settings for Address Book and
Phone Book are cleared.
•

Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the
the printer.

(Menu) button, turn on

NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform
steps 1 to 5. Press the
button until Change Password is highlighted, and
then press the
button. Enter the new password, and then press the
button. This will change the password.

Disabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Enter the password, and then press the
5 Press the
press the

button.

button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the

button.

7 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the
button.
8 Press the
button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the
button.

406

Understanding the Printer Menus

Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters
or data are reset to their default values.
1 Press the
2 Press the
button.

(Menu) button.
button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
press the

button until Initialize NVM is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Press the
button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
7 Press the
button.

button until Yes is highlighted, and then press the

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.

Understanding the Printer Menus

407

408

Understanding the Printer Menus

Understanding Your Printer
Software (Windows Only)

21

Use the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer to install a
combination of software programs, depending on your operating system.

Printer Status Window
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an
error occurs, for example, when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low.
By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs.
When an error occurs, the error message appears on the Printer Status
window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when
printing in Printing Status Window Properties.
You can also check the toner level of your printer.

Status Monitor Console
Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status
Window for a particular printer.
Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name
to open a Status Window for a particular printer.

Dell Supplies Management System
You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the
All Programs menu or the desktop icon.
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Dell Supplies Management System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If you are ordering from the web:
a

Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)

409

b

Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
Dell 1355cn Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System
window appears.

c

Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK.

If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone
section.

Software Update
The firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell
Support website located at support.dell.com.

Quick Launch Utility
Using the Quick Launch Utility window, you can open the Status Window,
Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, ScanButton
Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility
when you install the Dell software.
To open the Quick Launch Utility window:
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Quick Launch Utility.
The Quick Launch Utility dialog box opens.

410

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)

2 The Quick Launch Utility window provides seven buttons; Status
Window, Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor,
ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To exit, click the X button at the top-right of the window.
For details, click the Help button of each application.

Status Window

Click to open the Printing Status window. See "Printer
Status Window" on page 409.

Tool Box

Click to open the Tool Box. See "Understanding the Tool
Box Menus" on page 323.

Updater

Click to update the Dell software and printer firmware.

Troubleshooting

Click to open the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you
to resolve issues by yourself.

Address Book Editor

Click to open the Address Book Editor, which allows you to
create and edit Address Book entries.

ScanButton Manager

Click to open the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to
specify how the ScanButton Manager behaves for scan
events that the device generates.

Dell ScanCenter

Click to open the Dell ScanCenter.

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)

411

Address Book Editor
2

3

1
4

1

Read the Device Address Book entries from the printer to the Address Book
Editor and read the PC Fax Address Book entries from the PC to the Address
Book Editor.

2

Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box.

3

Deletes a selected Address Book entry.

4

Displays Address Book entries.

NOTE: You must install the fax driver before reading or editing the Address Book

entries.

For more information about Address Book Editor, see the Help of Address
Book Editor.

412

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)

ScanButton Manager
The Scan to Application stores the image files in the My Documents
folder by default, and then you can open them using the related application.
Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the obtained
image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related
application.

ScanDirect
ScanDirect is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send
them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without
running the PaperPort program first. For more information about using
ScanDirect, refer to PaperPort's Help menu.

User Setup Disk Creating Tool
The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder
of the Utilities folder on the Drivers and Utilities CD and the printer drivers
located on the Drivers and Utilities CD are used to create driver installation

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)

413

packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package
can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and other data for things
such as:
•

Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)

•

Watermarks

If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple
computers running on the same operating system, create a setup disk in a
floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have
created will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer
driver.

414

•

Install the Dell™ 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer driver in the
computer on which the setup disk is to be created.

•

The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk
was created or computers running the same operating system. Create a
separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)

22

Understanding Printer Messages

The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of
the printer and indicates possible printer problems you must resolve. This
chapter describes messages, their meanings, and how to clear the messages.
NOTICE: When an error code is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer
and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secured.

1

Data LED

3

buttons

5

button

2
4

buttons

6

(Cancel) button
(Back) button

7

(Start) button

8

9

AC (All Clear) button

10

11

LCD Panel

12

*1

Ready / Error LED*1

(Backspace) button
(Menu) button

The Error LED is on the right and blinks when an error occurs.

Understanding Printer Messages

415

Error-Code

What you can do

001-360

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

003-340
003-356
005-121

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the
ADF" on page 461.

005-301

Close the ADF cover.

006-370

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

007-340
007-371
009-360
009-361

Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner
Cartridge" on page 442.

009-362
009-363
009-654
010-354

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

010-377
016-315
016-317
016-338
016-344
016-347
016-354
016-355
016-370
016-372
016-374
016-375
016-376
016-377

416

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

016-393

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

016-395

button. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set

016-503

Press the
correctly.

016-504

button. Check if user name and password for POP3
Press the
server and DNS server are set correctly.

016-507

Press the
button. Check if user name and password used for
SMTP server are set correctly.

016-700

Press the

button to cancel the current print job.

016-701
016-720
016-745

button. Contact Dell if this message appears
Press the
repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

016-749

Press the

button to cancel the current print job.

016-764

Press the

button. Contact SMTP server administrator.

016-767

Press the

button. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.

016-794

Press the

button to clear the message.

016-744

016-766

016-795
016-797
016-920

button. Execute the operation again according to the
Press the
operation procedure.

016-981

Press the

016-985
017-970

button. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution
Press the
setting or changing the file format of the scanned image.

017-980

Press the

button to cancel the current print job.

button to clear the message.

017-981
017-988
024-914

Load the specified paper. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media
in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.
Understanding Printer Messages

417

Error-Code

What you can do

024-969

Load the appropriate paper. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media
in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.

026-720

Press the

button to clear the message.

026-721
026-722
026-723
026-750
026-751
026-752
027-446
027-452

Change IP address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and
turn it on again.

031-521

button. Confirm login-able computer with your
Press the
system administrator.

031-526

button. Check DNS connection, or check if
Press the
forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.

031-529

Press the

031-530

Press the
button. Check if storage location is correct. Storage
location you specified is DFS setting, and check if it is linked to
other server. Specify directly linked server, share name, and storage
location.

031-533

Press the

031-534

• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.

button. Check if password is correct.

button. Check the following:

• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified
already exists.
031-535
031-536

Press the
button. Check if other user is not operating file in
storage location you specified.

031-537

Press the

button. Check if storage location has free space.

031-555

Press the

button to clear the message.

Press the
FTP server.

button. Change the file name that already exists on

031-556
031-557

418

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

031-558

Press the

button to clear the message.

031-571
031-574

button. Check DNS connection, or check if name of
Press the
forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.

031-575

Press the
button. Set DNS address, or set forwarding
destination server address as IP address.

031-576

button. Check if the printer communicates with
Press the
forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check connection of
network cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.

031-578

button. Check if login name (user name) and
Press the
password are correct.

031-579

Press the

031-582

Press the
button. Check if the file name you specified can be
created in storage location. Check if storage location has free space.

031-584

button. Check if the folder name you specified can be
Press the
created in storage location. Check if the folder that has the same
name as the one you specified already exists.

031-585

Press the

button. Check server access rights.

031-588

Press the

button. Check if storage location has free space.

031-589

Press the

button to clear the message.

031-594

Press the
button. Execute the operation again according to the
operation procedure. Contact Dell if this message appears
repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

031-598

button. Check append access right to the file and if
Press the
server supports FTP append command.

033-503

Press the

033-513

button. Print the received fax, or wait for a while until
Press the
sending a fax is completed.

033-517

Press the

button. Check if password is correct.

033-518

Press the

button. Check if your country code is set correctly.

button. Check if storage location is correct.

031-587

button to clear the message.

Understanding Printer Messages

419

Error-Code

What you can do

033-519

Press the

button to clear the message.

033-787
033-788

button. Remove the received fax, or wait for a while
Press the
until sending a fax is completed. Press the
button to clear the
message.

034-700

button to clear the message. Check that the phone
Press the
line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone Line" on
page 48.

034-701
034-702
034-703
034-704
034-705
034-706
034-707
034-708
034-709
034-710
034-711
034-712
034-713
034-714
034-715
034-716
034-717
034-718
034-719
034-720
034-721
034-722
034-723
034-724

420

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

034-725
034-726
034-727
034-750
034-751
034-752
034-753
034-754
034-755
034-756
034-757
034-758
034-759
034-760
034-761
034-762
034-763
034-764
034-765
034-766
034-767
034-768
062-321

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

062-790

Press the

075-100

Check and clear the paper path, load the specified paper, and then
button. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of
press the
the Printer" on page 465.

075-921

Load paper for the second side (odd) pages, and press the
button. See Figure "Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer
Driver Only)" on page 218.

button.

Understanding Printer Messages

421

Error-Code

What you can do

077-100

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 459.

077-101
077-102

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the
Back of the Printer" on page 467.

077-104

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 459.

077-105
077-300

Close the rear cover.

077-900

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the
Output Tray" on page 470.

077-901

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 459.

091-402

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

092-310

Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density
(CTD) Sensor" on page 448.

093-423

Replace the specified toner cartridge soon. Order a new consumable
from www.dell.com/supplies.

093-424
093-425

See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.

093-426
093-919
093-920

Re-install or replace the specified toner cartridge. See "Replacing
Toner Cartridges" on page 441.

093-921
093-922
093-930
093-931
093-932
093-933
093-960
093-961
093-962

Remove the specified toner cartridge and install a new one. If you do
not replace the toner cartridge, print quality problems may occur.
Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.
"Replace the specified toner cartridge with the supported one. Order
a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.

093-963

422

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

093-970

Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner
Cartridge" on page 442.

093-971
093-972
093-973
117-331
117-332

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

117-333
117-334
117-340
117-342
117-343
117-344
117-346
117-348
117-349
117-350
117-351
117-366
124-333
134-211

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

191-310
193-700

This message indicates the printer is in the non-Dell toner mode.

Understanding Printer Messages

423

424

Understanding Printer Messages

23

Printing with Web Services on
Devices (WSD)

This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the new
Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and
Windows® 7 protocol of Microsoft®.

Adding Roles of Print Services
When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need
to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008 or Windows
Server 2008 R2 client.
For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the
Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
5 Click Install.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles
window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4 Click Next.
5 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
6 Click Install.

Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)

425

Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities
CD that shipped with your printer, or using Microsoft's Windows Add Printer
wizard.

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
1 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers (Start
Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
2 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4 In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then
click Next.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form
of http://IP address/ws/.

NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address
manually to create a WSD printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually,
follow the instructions below. For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD
printer, you must be a member of Administrators group.
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and
click Next.

NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer? wizard on Windows
Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of the followings:
•

Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your
computer.

•

Add the printer driver to your computer in advance.

5 If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are
prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
6 Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
7 Print a test page to verify print installation.

426

Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)

a

Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers
(Start Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and
Windows 7).

b

Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Properties
(Printer properties for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
On the Options tab, set each setting item, and then click Apply.

c

On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page is printed
successfully, installation is complete.

Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)

427

428

Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)

24

Specifications
Operating System Compatibility

Your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer is compatible with
Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server®
2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows
Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,
Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Mac OS® X 10.4.11/10.5.6, 10.6.x
or later.
1

Dell technical phone support only supports factory-installed operating
systems (Microsoft) for the first 30 days for free. See
http://www1.us.dell.com/content/products/compare.aspx/laser?c=us&cs=
555&l=en&s=biz for more details. The customer will have to purchase
technical support from the manufacturer of the operating system in order to
get technical assistance beyond 30 days.

2

If the customer has other operating systems and has purchased Gold
Technical Support (for more information on Gold Technical Support, see
http://www1.us.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/services/en/gts?c=
us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz), the telephone support will be a "best effort"
attempt to resolve the operating system issue. If the manufacturer needs to be
contacted, the customer must pay an additional fee for that support. The only
time that Dell pays for the third party support is when Dell is responsible for
the issue. In the case of getting the printer installed and working, this is
configuration and the customer would be responsible for paying.

Power Supply
Rated Voltage

220-240 VAC

Frequency

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

Current

5.0 A

11.0 A

110-127 VAC

Specifications

429

Dimensions
Height: 338 mm (13.31 inches) Width: 410 mm (16.14 inches) Depth: 379
mm (14.92 inches)
Weight (only the toner cartridges are included):
•

1355cn: 14.8 kg (32.63 lb)

•

1355cnw: 14.9 kg (32.85 lb)

Memory
Base memory

128 MB

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation,
Operating System, and Interface
PDL/Emulations Host-based printing system
OSes

Microsoft Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista,
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows
Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit
Edition, Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Mac OS X
Version 10.4.11, 10.5.8, and 10.6

Interfaces

Standard local:

USB 2.0

Standard network:

10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g
(Wireless)

MIB Compatibility
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information
about network devices (such as adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This
information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze
performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw

430

Specifications

Multifunction Color Printer complies with standard industry MIB
specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various
printer and network management software systems.

Environment
Operation
Temperature

10-32°C

Relative humidity

10-85% RH (no condensation)

Print Quality Guarantee

Temperature

15-28°C

Relative humidity

20-70% RH (no condensation)

Storage
Temperature range

-20-40°C

Storage humidity range

5-80% RH (no condensation)

Altitude
Operating

Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)

Storage

70.9275 Kpa

NOTE: For more information on adjusting the altitude, see "Adjust Altitude" on
page 340.

Cables
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:

Specifications

431

Connection type

Connection specifications and symbols

1

Ethernet

10 Base-T/100 Base-TX

2

USB

USB 2.0

3

Wall Jack Connector

4

Phone Connector

1
2
3
4

Copier Specifications
Item

Description

Copy Resolution

Optical: 600x600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch),
ADF: 600x300 dots/25.4mm (1 inch)
(Same for Color/Black&White)

432

Specifications

Item

Description

Copy Speed

Color 12 cpm or more, Black&White 15 cpm or more
(When using the document glass to make sequential
copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)
Color 2.87 cpm or more, Black&White 10.64 cpm or
more (When using the ADF to make sequential copies
of multiple documents.)

Paper Size

A4, A5, B5, Executive, Letter, Folio, Legal, Monarch,
DL, C5, Envelope #10

Zoom Rate

Document glass: 25% - 400%, ADF: 25% - 400%

Multiple copies

1 - 99 pages

Copy mode (=Original
Type)

Text, Text & Photo, Photo

Scanning method

Platen: Document-fixed flatbed scanning method
ADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning
method (one side scanning)

Scanner Specifications
Item

Description

Compatibility

Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN),
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)

Scan Resolution

TWAIN: 75 x 75 to 4800 x 4800 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
WIA: 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm
(1 inch)
Resolutions other than the following are achieved by
driver's resolution conversion:
200 x 200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
300 x 300 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch) (Default)
600 x 600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
1200 x 1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

Color bit depth

24 bit (WIA, TWAIN)

Mono bit depth

1 bit for Line art and 8 bit for Gray scale
Specifications

433

Item

Description

Effective scanning length

Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)

Effective scanning width

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

Scan speed (Text mode)

Black&White:
641.22 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
1265.19 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))
Color:
2176.52 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
4363.36 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))

Facsimile Specifications
Item

Description

Compatibility

ITU-T Group 3

Applicable line

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)

Data coding

Black&White: 1bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding
Color: Not supported

Max modem speed

33.6 Kbps

Transmission speed

Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to
memory transmission of text data scanned in Standard
resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.

Scanning speed

Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax
resolution mode) ADF: approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at
standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at
fine fax resolution mode)

Maximum document length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Paper size

434

Specifications

Letter, A4, Legal

Item

Description

Resolution

Standard: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 3.85 lines/mm
(98 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 100 dpi
Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 7.7 lines/mm (196
lines/inch)
200 dpi x 200 dpi
Super Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm
(391 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 400 dpi
Ultra Fine: 16 pels/mm (406 pels/inch) x 15.4
lines/mm (391 lines/inch)
400 dpi x 400 dpi

User Memory

2 MB

Halftone

256 levels

Specifications

435

436

Specifications

Maintaining Your Printer

437

438

Maintaining Your Printer

25

Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain
optimum print quality. If several people are using the printer, you may want to
designate a key operator to maintain your printer. Refer printing problems
and maintenance tasks to this key operator.

Determining the Status of Supplies
If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool can provide instant feedback on remaining toner levels. Type the
printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use the
E-Mail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new
supplies, type your name or the name of the key operator in the e-mail list
box.
On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:
•

Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing
(However, the printer can only display information about one item at a
time.)

•

Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge

Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner
cartridge and paper.
Supply

Setting

Function

Toner
cartridge

Toner Saving Mode in
the Graphics tab of the
printer driver

This check box allows the users to select a
print mode that uses less toner. When this
feature is used, the image quality will be lower
than when it is not used.

Maintaining Your Printer

439

Supply

Setting

Function

Print
media

Multiple Up in the
The printer prints two or more pages on one
Layout tab of the printer side of a sheet. The available numbers that
driver
each printer driver can print one sheet of paper
are as follows:
• Windows Printer Driver: 2, 4, 8, or 16 pages
• Macintosh Printer Driver: 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16
pages
Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple
Up allows you to print up to 32 pages on one
sheet of paper. (16 images on the front and 16
on the back)

Storing Print Media
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are
several things you can do.
•

To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an
environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the
relative humidity is 40%.

•

Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the
floor.

•

If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton,
ensure that they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.

•

Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do
not store consumables in:

440

•

Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).

•

An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.

•

Direct sunlight.

•

Dusty places.

•

A car for a long period of time.
Maintaining Your Printer

•

An environment where corrosive gases are present.

•

An environment with salty air.

Replacing Toner Cartridges
CAUTION: Before replacing toner cartridges, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Product Information Guide.
Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more
cartridges online at http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by
phone, see "Contacting Dell" on page 504.
It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell
does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories,
parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
CAUTION: Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could
explode resulting in burns and injuries.
CAUTION: Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of toner.

Removing the Toner Cartridges
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Open the toner access cover.

3 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.

Maintaining Your Printer

441

CAUTION: Always pull the cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner.
4 Pull the toner cartridge out.

Installing a Toner Cartridge
1 Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color and shake it five to six
times to distribute the toner evenly.

442

Maintaining Your Printer

NOTE: Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the
handle before replacing it.

NOTE: Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spillage of the toner.
2 Remove the tape from the toner cartridge.

3 Adjust the toner cartridge to the associated cartridge holder, and then
insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label until the cartridge
clicks.

Maintaining Your Printer

443

4 Close the toner access cover.

Cleaning Inside the Printer
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
1 Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the toner access
cover.

444

Maintaining Your Printer

2 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.

3 Pull the toner cartridge out.

Maintaining Your Printer

445

4 Pull the other three cartridges out as well.
5 Pull the cleaning rod out.

6 Insert the cleaning rod fully into the hole beside the arrow on the printer
until its tip reaches the interior of the printer as illustrated below, and then
pull it out.

446

Maintaining Your Printer

7 Repeat the same procedure for the other three holes.
8 Return the cleaning rod to its original location.

9 Replace the black cartridge by adjusting it to the associated cartridge
holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label
until the cartridge clicks.

Maintaining Your Printer

447

10 Replace the other three cartridges as well.
11 Close the toner access cover.

Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor
Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the
Status Monitor or operator panel.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

448

Maintaining Your Printer

3 Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab.

4 Close the rear cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

449

Adjusting Color Registration
This section describes how to adjust the color registration when you first
install the printer or after moving it to a new location.

Performing Auto Adjust
Auto Adjust allows you to correct the color registration automatically.
The Operator Panel

1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the
button.

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
4 Press the
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
the
button.
5 Press the
press the

button until Adjust ColorRegi is highlighted, and then
button.

6 Ensure that Auto Adjust is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Ensure that Are you sure? is highlighted, and then select Yes by
pressing the
button.
450

Maintaining Your Printer

Auto adjust is performed.
The Tool Box

NOTE:
1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers  Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer  Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer window is highlighted in this step, when multiple

printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of
Dell 1355 Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4 Uncheck the check box next to On.
5 Click the Start button next to Auto Correct.
The color registration is corrected automatically.

Printing the Color Registration Chart
The Tool Box

NOTE:
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer

drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4 Uncheck the check box next to On.
5 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart.
Maintaining Your Printer

451

The color registration chart is printed.

Determining Values
On the color registration chart printed, find the straightest lines where the
two black lines and the colored line are most closely aligned for each color (Y,
M, and C).
If you find the straightest line, make a note of the value (-5 - +5) indicated by
the straightest line for each color.
When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color
registration.
When the value is not 0, enter the value according to the procedure in
"Entering Values" on page 453.

452

Maintaining Your Printer

Entering Values
The Tool Box

NOTE:
Using the Tool Box, enter the values that you found in the color registration
chart to make adjustments.
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Tool Box.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
Maintaining Your Printer

453

3 Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4 Select the value with the straight line, and then click the Apply New
Settings button.
5 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.
6 Adjust until all straight lines are at the value of 0. Show image of before
and after adjustment will help.
NOTICE: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until
the printer motor has stopped running.

Cleaning the Scanner
Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is
recommended to clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the
day, as needed.
1 Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the document cover.

3 Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and
dry.

454

Maintaining Your Printer

1
4

2

3

1

White Strip

2

White Document Cover

3

Document Glass

4

ADF Glass

4 Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until
they are clean and dry.

5 Close the document cover.
Maintaining Your Printer

455

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller
Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is
recommended to clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals.
1 Open the ADF cover.

2 Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until
it is clean.
If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may
also be soiled. In this case, slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper
towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the
contamination from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.

456

Maintaining Your Printer

Maintaining Your Printer

457

458

Maintaining Your Printer

26

Clearing Jams

Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to
avoid most jams. See "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189 for more
information.
NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that
you try a sample first.

Avoiding Jams
•

Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" on
page 189 for more information.

•

See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202
and "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211
to load print media properly.

•

Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the stack print
media height does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load
line labels in the tray.

•

Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.

•

Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs
with print media, try feeding one sheet at a time through the single sheet
feeder.

•

Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed.

•

Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media
source.

•

Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the
print media. Also, the recommended print side should be face down when
using the single sheet feeder.

•

Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more
information, see "Storing Print Media" on page 196.

•

Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.

•

Push the tray in firmly after loading.

Clearing Jams

459

•

Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.

•

Overtightening the guides may cause jams.

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
CAUTION: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may
permanently damage the printer.
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print
media path.

1

2

4

7

1

Scanner Unit

2

Fuser

3

Fuser Release Lever

4

Rear Cover

460

Clearing Jams

6

5

3

5

ADF Cover

6

Front Cover

7

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF
When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF), remove jams in the following procedure.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The
fuser becomes extremely hot during use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print
media from the print media path.
1 Open the ADF cover.

2 Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of
the arrow shown in the following illustration.

Clearing Jams

461

3 If you find it difficult to pull the document, open the document feeder
tray.

4 Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.

462

Clearing Jams

5 Close the document feeder tray.

6 Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.

Clearing Jams

463

NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legalsize document.

7 If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output
tray or cannot find any jammed document there, open the document
output tray.

8 Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by
carefully pulling the document in the direction of the arrow shown in the
following illustration.

464

Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print
media from the print media path.
1 Pull the PSI out.

Clearing Jams

465

2 Remove any paper jammed from the front of the printer.

3 Replace the PSI in the printer.

466

Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The
fuser becomes extremely hot during use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print
media from the print media path.
1 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

Clearing Jams

467

2 Lift up the fuser release levers.

3 Remove any paper jammed from the back of the printer.

468

Clearing Jams

4 Lower the fuser release levers to their original position.

5 Close the rear cover.

Clearing Jams

469

Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The
fuser becomes extremely hot during use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print
media from the print media path.
1 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

470

Clearing Jams

2 Lift up the fuser release levers.

3 Remove any paper jammed from the back of the printer. If no paper is
found in the paper path, face the front of the printer and check the output
tray.

Clearing Jams

471

4 Lift and open the scanner unit.

5 Remove any paper jammed out of the output tray.

472

Clearing Jams

6 Lower and close the scanner unit.

7 Lower the fuser release levers to their original position.

Clearing Jams

473

8 Close the rear cover.

474

Clearing Jams

Troubleshooting

475

476

Troubleshooting

27

Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your
printer, check each of the following:
•

The power cable is connected to the printer, and to a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

•

The printer is turned on.

•

The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.

•

Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

•

When your printer is connected to the network with the Ethernet cable,
the USB cable is not connected between the printer and the computer.

•

When your printer is connected to the computer with the USB cable, the
Ethernet cable is not connected between the printer and the network.

If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the
printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. This often fixes the
problem.

Display Problems
Problem

Action

• Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on
After the printer is turned
the printer.
on, the display on the
operator panel is blank, keeps • Self Test Message appears on the operator panel.
showing the DELL logo, or
When the test is completed, Ready is displayed.
the back light is not lit.

Troubleshooting

477

Problem

Action

Menu settings changed from Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or
the operator panel have no
the printer utilities have precedence over the settings
effect.
made on the operator panel.
Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the
printer utilities, or the software program instead of the
operator panel.

Printing Problems
Problem

Action

Job did not print or incorrect Ensure that Ready appears on the operator panel
before you send a job to print.
characters printed.
Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer.
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB
cable and that it is securely connected to the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler
has not stalled.
Check the interface of your printer from the Admin
Menu.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a
device settings page to verify that the current interface
settings are correct. Refer to "Printing a System
Settings Page" on page 232 for details on how to print
a device settings page.

478

Troubleshooting

Problem

Action

Print media misfeeds or
multiple feeds occur

Ensure that the print media you are using meets the
specifications for your printer. See "Supported Paper
Sizes" on page 196 for more information.
Fan the print media before loading it.
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Ensure that the width and length guides are adjusted
correctly.
Ensure that the PSI is securely inserted.
Do not overfill the print media sources.
Do not force print media into the Priority Sheet
Inserter (PSI) or the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
when you load it. Otherwise, it may skew or buckle.
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Load the recommended print side correctly for the
type of print media you are using. See "Loading Print
Media" on page 201 for more information.
Turn the print media over or around and try printing
again to see if feeding improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream
before loading the print media.
Load a print media source only when it is empty.

The envelope is creased after Ensure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in
printing.
"Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.
Page breaks in unexpected
places.

Increase the setting for Time-Out in the Printer
Settings menu in the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.

Print media does not stack
neatly in the output bin.

Turn the print media stack over in the PSI and MPF.

Troubleshooting

479

Problem

Action

Printer does not duplex
pages.

Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from
the Duplex menu on the Paper/Output tab in the
printer driver.

Print Quality Problems
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be
performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For
information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see
"Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 and "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool" on page 123.

The output is too light

Action
1

Yes

The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is
replaced. Confirm the amount of toner in each complete.
toner cartridge.
1 Check the toner level in the Status tab in the
Status Monitor.
2 Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

No
Go to action 2.

Is the problem recovered?
2

Verify that the print media is not damp and the The task is
correct print media is used. See "Supported
complete.
Paper Sizes" on page 196. If not, use the print
media recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?

480

Troubleshooting

Go to action 3.

Action
3

Yes

No

Verify that the Paper Type setting in the printer The task is
complete.
driver matches the print media you loaded.
1 On the Paper/Output tab in Printing
Preferences of the printer driver, check the
Paper Type setting.
2 Load dry (not damp) and corrected print
media, and then click Print Test Page in
Properties of the printer driver.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side

Action
1

Yes

No

The print media surface may be uneven. Try
The task is
changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete.
driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
1 On the Paper/Output tab in Printing
Preferences of the printer driver, change the
Paper Type setting.

Go to action 2.

Is the problem recovered?
2

Verify that the correct print media is being
The task is
used. See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 196. complete.
If not, use the print media recommended for
the printer.

Go to action 3.

Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

481

Action

Yes

No

3

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

No

1

The task is
complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is
complete.

Go to action 3.

Adjust the fuser temperature.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Fuser
on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up
the value for your printing media.
3 Click Apply New Settings.
4 Click close box to exit Tool Box.
Is the problem recovered?

Random spots/Blurred images

Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed
correctly. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on
page 442.
Is the problem recovered?

2

If you use non-Dell brand toner cartridges,
install Dell brand toner cartridges.
Is the problem recovered?

482

Troubleshooting

Action
3

Yes

No

Clean up the fuser unit.
The task is
1 Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then complete.
print a solid image all over paper.
2 Load the printed sheet with the side to be
printed on facing down, and then print a blank
sheet of paper.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

The entire output is blank

If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.

Streaks appear on the output

If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.

Troubleshooting

483

Pitched color dots

If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.

Vertical blanks

Action
1

Yes

The task is
Clean inside the printer and performing test
complete.
print.
1 Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning
rod. See "Cleaning Inside the Printer" on
page 444.
2 Click Print Test Page in Properties of the
printer driver.
Is the problem recovered?

484

Troubleshooting

No
Contact Dell.

Ghosting

Action
1

Yes

No

Adjust the transfer bias.
The task is
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on complete.
the Diagnosis tab.
2 Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.

Go to action 2.

The ghost configuration chart is printed.
3 Launch the Tool Box, and click BTR Refresh
Mode on the Printer Maintenance tab.
4 Check the check box next to On, and then
click Apply New Settings.
5 Click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
6 Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.
The ghost configuration chart is printed.
Is the problem recovered?
2

The print media surface may be uneven. Try
changing the Paper Type setting in the printer
driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
1 On the Paper/Output tab in Printing
Preferences of the printer driver, change the
Paper Type setting.

The task is
complete.

Go to action 3.

Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

485

Action

Yes

No

3

The task is
complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

No

1

Is the whole page printed light?

Contact Dell.

Go to action 2.

2

Start Clean Developer.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean
Developer on the Diagnosis tab.
2 Click the Start button.

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Adjust the fuser temperature.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Fuser
on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up
the value for your printing media.
3 Click Apply New Settings.
4 Click close box to exit Tool Box.
Is the problem recovered?

4

If you use non-recommended print media, use
the print media recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?

Fog

Is the problem recovered?

486

Troubleshooting

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)

Action

Yes

No

1

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

If the printer is installed in a high altitude
location, set the altitude of the location.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust
Altitude on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Select the value close to the altitude of the
location where the printer is installed.
Is the problem recovered?

Auger mark

Troubleshooting

487

Action
1

Yes

The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is
replaced. Confirm the amount of toner in each complete.
toner cartridge.
1 Check the toner level in the Status tab in the
Status Monitor.
2 Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

No
Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?
2

Start Clean Developer.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean
Developer on the Diagnosis tab.
2 Click the Start button.

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Wrinkled/Stained paper

Action
1

Yes

Verify that the correct print media is being
The task is
used. See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 196 complete.
and "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189. If
not, use the print media recommended for the
printer.
Is the problem recovered?

488

Troubleshooting

No
If printing on
an envelope, go
to action 2.
If printing on
print media
other than
envelopes,
contact Dell.

Action
2

Yes

No

Check the crease. Is the crease within 30 mm of This type of
the four edges of the envelope?
crease is
considered
normal. Your
printer is not at
fault.

If the envelope
is 220 mm or
longer (C5 or
Envelope#10),
go to action 3a.
If the envelope
is shorter than
220 mm
(Monarch or
DL), go to
action 3b.

3a Does the envelope have a flap on the long edge? The envelope is The envelope
Envelope#10. is C5. Go to
action 4a.
Go to 4b.
3b Load the envelope long edge feed in the MPF
with the flap open and facing up. For details,
see "When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or
Monarch" on page 207.

The task is
complete.

Go to action
4b.

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?
4a Load the envelope in the MPF with the flap
open and facing up. For details, see "When
Loading C5" on page 208.
Is the problem recovered?
4b Use a different size envelope.
Is the problem recovered?

The top margins is incorrect

Troubleshooting

489

Action
1

Yes

Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the The task is
application being used.
complete.

No
Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Color registration is out of alignment

Action

Yes

1

The task is
Execute auto color registration adjustment.
complete.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration
Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Click the Start button next to Auto Correct.

2

The task is
Clean the CTD sensor.
complete.
1 Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the
Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor" on
page 448.
2 Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration
Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Click the Start button next to Auto Correct.

No
Go to action 2.

Is the problem recovered?

Is the problem recovered?

490

Troubleshooting

Go to action 3.

Action
3

Yes

No

Print the color registration chart and manually The task is
correct the color registration.
complete.
1 Click Registration Adjustment on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
2 Click the Start button next to Print Color
Regi Chart.

Contact Dell.

The color registration chart is printed.
3 Adjust till all straight lines are at the value of

0. See "Adjusting Color Registration" on
page 450 for details.
4 Click the Apply New Settings button.
5 Click the Start button next to Print Color
Regi Chart to print the color registration chart
again.
Is the problem recovered?

Protrudent / Bumpy paper

Action
1

Yes

No

The task is
Clean up the fuser unit.
1 Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then complete.
print a solid image all over paper.
2 Load the printed sheet with the side to be
printed on facing down, and then print a blank
sheet of paper.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

491

Jam
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be
performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For
information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see
"Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 and "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool" on page 123.

Misfeed jam
Action

Yes

No

1

The task is
complete.

Proceed to the
action
corresponding
to the type of
the print media
being used:

Remove the paper from the PSI, and then
ensure that papers are properly inserted on the
MPF.
Is the problem recovered?

• Thick - 2a
• Thin - 2b
• Envelope 2c
If performing
manual duplex
printing, go to
action 2d.
If using paper
other than the
above or if not
performing
duplex
printing, go to
action 2e.
2a Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.
Is the problem recovered?
2b Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
Is the problem recovered?

492

Troubleshooting

The task is
complete.

Go to action
3a.

The task is
complete.

Go to action
3a.

Action

Yes

No

2c Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in The task is
the MPF as instructed in "Loading an Envelope complete.
in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on
page 207.

Go to action
3b.

Is the problem recovered?
2d Ensure that the print media is not curled.

The task is
complete.

Go to action
3a.

2e Is the print media damp?

Go to action
3c.

Go to action
3a.

3a Fan the print media.

The task is
complete.

Go to action
3b.

The task is
complete.

Go to action
3a.

The task is
complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

No

1

The task is
complete.

Go to action 2.

Go to action
3a.

Go to action
3b.

The task is
complete.

Go to action
3b.

Is the problem recovered?

Is the problem recovered?
3b If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use
another envelope.
Is the problem recovered?
3c Turn over the print media.
Is the problem recovered?
4

Use print media that is not damp.
Is the problem recovered?

Multi-feed jam

Remove the paper from the PSI, and then
ensure that papers are inserted properly in the
MPF.
Is the problem recovered?

2

Is the print media damp?

3a Use print media that is not damp.
Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

493

Action

Yes

No

3b Fan the print media.

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

A document jam occurs in the ADF if scanning of multiple-sheet document
is cancelled while scanning is in progress.

Action

Yes

No

1

The task is
complete.

Contact Dell.

Clear the jam. See "Clearing Paper Jams From
the ADF" on page 461.
Is the problem recovered?

Copy Problem
Problem

Action

A document loaded in the
ADF cannot be copied.

Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.

Fax Problems
Problem

Action

The printer is not working,
there is no display and the
buttons are not working.

Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

No dial tone sounds.

Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 48.

Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.

Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by
plugging in another phone.

494

Troubleshooting

Problem

Action

The numbers stored in the
Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory
memory do not dial correctly. correctly.
Print a Address Book list.
The document does not feed Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are
into the printer.
putting it in correctly. Check that the document is of
the right size, not too thick or thin.
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received
automatically.

The FAX mode should be selected.
Ensure that there is paper in the PSI or MPF.
Check to see if the display shows Memory Full.

The printer does not send
faxes.

Sending should show up on the display.
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see
if it can receive your fax.

The incoming fax has blank The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
spaces or is received in poor- A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
quality.
Check your printer by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner
cartridge. For details, see "Replacing Toner Cartridges"
on page 441.
Some of the words on an
incoming fax are stretched.

The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary
document jam.

There are lines on the
documents you send.

Check your scan glass for marks and clean it. See
"Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.

The printer dials a number,
but the connection with
another fax machine fails.

The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper,
or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other
machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the
problem.

Documents are not stored in There may not be enough memory to store the
the memory.
document. If the display shows a Memory Full
message, delete any documents you no longer need
from the memory and then restore the document, or
wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax transmission or
reception) to complete.

Troubleshooting

495

Problem

Action

Blank areas appear at the
bottom of each page or on
other pages, with a small
strip of text at the top.

You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the
user option setting. See "Print Media Guidelines" on
page 189.

The printer will not send or
receive faxes.

Ensure that the country code is set correctly under
(Menu)  System Admin Menu  Fax
Settings  Country.
Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 48.

An error often occurs during Reduce the modem speed under
(Menu) 
System  Admin Menu  Fax Settings 
a fax transmission or
Modem Speed.
reception.

Scanning Problems
Problem

Action

The scanner does not work.

Ensure that you place the document to be scanned
face down from the document feeder glass, or face up
in the ADF.
There may not be enough available memory to hold
the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan
function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan
resolution rate.
Check that the USB cable is connected properly.
Ensure that the USB cable is not defective. Switch the
cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the
cable.
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check
the application you want to use to make certain that
the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.

496

Troubleshooting

Problem

Action

The printer scans very slowly. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when
using the Scan to E-mail or Scan to Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory required to
analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time
than scanning at a low resolution.
Document misfeeds or
multiple feeds occur in the
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF).

Ensure that the document’s paper type meets the
specifications for the printer. See "Supported Paper
Types" on page 198 for more information.
Check whether the document is properly loaded in the
ADF.
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted
properly.
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not
exceed the maximum capacity of the ADF.
Ensure that the document is not curled.
Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.

Vertical stripes appear on the Clean the ADF glass.
output when scanned using See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.
the ADF.
A smear appears at the same Clean the document glass.
location on the output when See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.
scanned using the document
glass.
Images are skewed.

Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the
ADF or on the document glass.

Diagonal lines appear jagged If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from
when scanned using the
the document glass.
ADF.

Troubleshooting

497

Problem

Action

The printer does not properly Check if the following settings have been set correctly
transfer scan data to a
on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
specified destination via the
Scan to E-mail or Scan to
Scan to Network
Network feature.
Check the following settings under Address Book 
Server Address:
• Server Address
• Share Name
• Server Path
• Login Name
• Login Password
Scan to E-mail
Check the following setting under Address Book 
Fax/E-Mail:
• E-Mail Address
Cannot scan using WIA on a Enable WIA on the computer.
Windows Server 2003
To enable WIA:
computer.
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then
click Services.
2 Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and
then click Start.
Cannot scan using TWAIN Install the Desktop Experience feature on the
or WIA on a Windows Server computer.
2008 or Windows Server
To install Desktop Experience:
2008 R2 computer.
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then
click Server Manager.
2 Under Features Summary, click Add Features.
3 Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next,
and then click Install.
4 Restart the computer.

498

Troubleshooting

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
Problem

Action

Unable to retrieve the
Address Book data from the
printer on the Address Book
Editor.

Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly
connected with the USB cable.

The TWAIN driver cannot
connect to the printer.

Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly
connected with the USB cable.

Ensure that the printer’s power is on.
Ensure that the printer driver is installed on your
computer. (The Address Book Editor retrieves the
Address Book data via the printer driver.)

Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on,
reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on
again.
If a scan application is running, close the application
once, restart the application, and then try scanning
again.
The scanner driver has not
been registered on your
computer and cannot be
accessed from ScanButton
Manager.

Install the scanner driver. If the driver is installed,
uninstall it and then reinstall it.

Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly
Failed to scan your
document on the printer via connected with the USB cable.
ScanButton Manager.
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on,
reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on
again.
If a scan application is running, close the application
once, restart the application, and then try scanning
again.
Failed to create an image file Ensure that there is sufficient space in your hard disk.
via ScanButton Manager.
Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
then reinstall it.
Failed to initialize
ScanButton Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
then reinstall it.

Troubleshooting

499

Problem

Action

Failed to execute ScanButton Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
Manager.
then reinstall it.
An unexpected error
occurred on ScanButton
Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
then reinstall it.

Other Problems
Problem

Action

Condensation has occurred
inside the printer.

This usually occurs within several hours after you heat
the room in winter. This also occurs when the printer is
operating in a location where relative humidity reaches
85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the
printer to an appropriate environment.

No file is displayed on the
operator panel when you are
selecting a file for Printing
from USB Memory feature.

Confirm that there are files with the supported file
formats (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG) in the USB storage
device.
If the target file is in a deep hierarchy in the USB
storage device, move the file to the root directory in
the USB storage device with your computer.
Shorten the target file name in the USB storage device
with your computer, and try printing again.

Contacting Service
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are
experiencing or the error message on the display.
You need to know the model of your printer and serial number. See the label
located inside the side door of your printer.

500

Troubleshooting

Appendix

501

502

B

Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy

Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and
participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for
restoration of the operating system, software program and hardware drivers to
the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the
verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed
hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online
technical support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support
options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed
software and peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is
provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or
installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and
Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).

Online Services
You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:
www.dell.com
www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only)
You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail
addresses:
•

Dell Support websites
support.dell.com

Appendix

503

support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
•

Dell Support e-mail addresses
mobile_support@us.dell.com
support@us.dell.com
la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)

•

Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses
apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only)

•

Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.

Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products
from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance
with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for
your printer, see support.dell.com.

Recycling Information
It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers,
and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of
parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/or materials.
For specific information on Dell's worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/
recyclingworldwide.

Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-Dell (800-999-3355).
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact
information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, in your Dell catalog.

504

Appendix

Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options.
Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be
available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or
customer service issues:
1 Visit support.dell.com.
2 Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down
menu at the bottom of the page.
3 Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.
4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.

Appendix

505

506

Appendix

Index
Numerics

Administrator Password, 178

100Base-TX Full-Duplex, 167

Alert Tone, 139, 147, 393

100Base-TX Half-Duplex, 167

All Tones, 140, 148

10Base-T Full-Duplex, 167

Altitude, 431

10Base-T Half-Duplex, 167

Ans/FAX Mode, 291
Answer Machine/Fax, 153

A
A4, 196
A5, 196
About printer, 33
AC (All Clear) button, 224, 415
Address Book, 125, 131, 147,
179, 374
Address Book Editor, 412
ADF Cover, 34, 36, 461
ADF Glass, 455
Ad-Hoc, 168
Adjust Altitude, 145, 158, 340,
401
Adjust BTR, 145, 156, 337, 397
Adjust ColorRegi, 399
Adjust Fuser, 145, 156, 338, 398
Adjusting Color
Registration, 450
Admin Menu, 374

Appendix, 503
Apply New Settings, 132
Asset Tag Number, 137
Authenticate Error Trap, 177
Auto Clear Alert Tone, 139, 148
Auto Exposure, 140, 142, 150,
152, 244, 362, 367
Auto Log Print, 140, 148, 395
Auto Rec Ans/FAX, 292, 382
Auto Rec Fax, 291, 382
Auto Rec TEL/FAX, 291, 382
Auto Receive Answer/Fax, 142,
154
Auto Receive Fax, 142, 153
Auto Receive Tel/Fax, 142, 153
Auto Regi Adjust, 399
Auto Registration
Adjustment, 145, 157
Auto Reset, 139, 147, 392

Index

507

Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF), 33, 36

Changing the settings of menu
item, 133

Automatic Redialing, 302

Chart Print, 356

Avoiding Jam, 229, 459

Clean Developer, 157-158, 356,
399
Clearing jam, 459
From ADF, 461

B

Backspace button, 224, 415

Clearing Paper Jam
From ADF, 461
From Back of the Printer, 467
From Front of the Printer, 465
From Output Tray, 470

Base memory, 430

Clock Mode, 289

Basic Information, 165

Clock Settings, 146, 159

Basic printer problem, 477
Blue plug, 48

Coated, 145, 156-157, 337-338,
397-398

Bonjour(mDNS), 163, 167

Collated, 141, 151, 239, 359

BTR Refresh, 400

Color, 140, 142, 150-151, 238,
359, 365

B&W / Color LED, 224
B5, 196
Back button, 224, 415

BTR Refresh Mode, 341

Color Balance, 363
Color Button Set, 365

C

Color Mode button, 224

C5, 196

Color Registration
Adjustment, 157

Cable, 431
Cancel button, 224, 415
Canceling a job, 230
Canceling print job
From computer, 230
Carbonless copy paper, 191
CCP, 191
508

Index

Color Registration Chart, 451
Color Test Page, 374
Community Name (Read
only), 176
Community Name
(Read/Write), 176
Community Name (Trap), 176

Company Name, 292, 385

D

Completed Jobs, 125, 138

Data LED, 223, 415

Configuring Wireless
Settings, 85

Date & Time, 336, 393

Connecting Printer, 43
Connection specification, 43,
432
Connection type, 43, 432
Conserving supplies, 439
Contact Dell Support at, 126,
131
Contact Person, 130
Contacting Service, 500

Date Format, 146
Defaults Settings, 329
Delayed Start, 142, 152, 370
Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, 123, 126
Page display format, 129
Dell Service Tag Number, 137
Dell Supplies Management
System, 409

Contacts button, 224

Dell Technical Support
Policy, 503

Control Panel Tone, 139, 147

Demo Page, 147

Copy button, 223

Details, 137

Copy Color Balance, 141, 150

Determining Values, 452

Copy Defaults, 140, 348

DHCP, 162, 172

Copy Problem, 494

Dimensions, 430

Copy Service Lock Set, 140, 149

Direct Fax, 303

Copy Settings, 141

Discard Size, 144, 155, 293, 388

Country, 144, 155, 293

Display Popup, 146

Cover, 136

Display Problem, 477

Covers, 145, 156-157, 337-338,
397-398

DL, 197

CTD Sensor, 448

DNS, 162, 172

Custom Reduce/Enlarge, 150

Document Feeder Tray, 33, 36

DL LEF, 197

Document Glass, 36, 455

Index

509

Document Guides, 36

Environment Sensor Info, 356

Document Output Tray, 33

Environment settings of your
web browser, 127

Document Size, 140, 142,
150-151, 241, 361, 366

Error History, 147, 374

Document Type, 298

Ethernet, 161, 167, 432

Driver, 25

Ethernet Port, 34, 44

Drivers and Utilities CD, 25

EWS, 345, 380

DRPD, 153

EWS Settings, 166

DRPD Mode, 291

Executive, 197

DRPD Pattern, 143, 154, 292,
386

Express Code, 396

F

E
ECM, 144, 155, 293, 389
Edit From Field, 404
E-Mail Alert, 126, 131, 167, 173,
380

F/W Version, 396
Fault Time-Out, 392
Fax Activity, 144, 155, 293, 374,
389

E-Mail Alert Settings, 165, 175

Fax Broadcast, 144, 155, 293,
390

E-Mail Alert Setup, 123

Fax button, 223

E-mail Alert Setup Page, 164

Fax Cover Page, 143, 154, 292,
385

E-Mail Server Settings, 164, 174
Emulations, 430
Encryption, 161, 169
Entering Values, 453
Envelope, 145, 156-157, 194,
337-338, 398

Fax Defaults, 142, 152, 347
Fax Forward Number, 143, 154
Fax Fwd Number, 293, 388
FAX Group, 181
Fax Group, 182

Envelope #10, 197

Fax Header, 143, 154, 292, 385

Environment, 431

Fax Header Name, 143, 154

510

Index

Fax Number, 143, 154, 292, 385

Host Name, 138, 162, 171

Fax Problems, 494

How to set up, 26

Fax Protocol, 144, 155

How to use, 25

Fax Service Lock Set, 140, 149

HTTP, 163, 172

Fax Settings, 142, 153, 331, 351,
381
FAX Speed Dial, 182

I

Fax Transmit, 144, 155, 293

ID, 137-138

File Format, 142, 151, 365

Identifying Print Media, 196

Finding Information, 25

Identifying Print
Specification, 196

Firmware Version, 137
Folio, 197

Image Compression, 142, 152,
369

Forward Settings, 292, 388

Impression Number, 138

Front Cover, 33, 461

Infrastructure, 168

Front USB Port, 33
FTP Client, 163

Initialize NIC NVM and restart
printer, 178

Function Enabled, 149, 402

Initialize NVM, 400

Fuser, 460

Installing
Printer drivers, 69

Fuser Release Lever, 34, 460

G

Installing a Toner Cartridge, 442
Interfaces, 430
IP Address, 130, 162, 171

Gateway Address, 162, 171

IP address, 162

Group Dial, 375

IP Address Mode, 162, 171

Group Dialing, 313

IP Mode, 162, 171
IPv4, 162, 171-172, 177

H

IPv6, 162, 171-172, 177

Host I/F, 138
Index

511

J
Jam, 492
Job History, 147, 374
Job List, 125, 137
Job Name, 138
Job Status, 138
Job Submitted Time, 138
Job Time-Out, 140, 148
Job Time-out, 392
Job Tone, 139, 147
Job Type, 138
Junk Fax Setup, 143, 154, 292,
353, 384

K

Lighter/Darker, 140, 142,
150-152, 243, 299, 362, 367,
370
Line Monitor, 143, 154, 292, 382
Line Type, 143, 154, 292, 383
Link Channel, 161, 168
Link Quality, 161, 168
Liquid crystal display, 223
LLTD, 163
Loading Envelope, 207
Loading Letterhead, 193, 210,
217
Loading Paper, 59
Loading Print Media, 201
MPF, 202
PSI, 211

Kensington lock, 37

Loading Print Media in
Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF), 59, 202

L

Loading Print Media in Priority
Sheet Inserter (PSI), 66, 211

Label, 144-145, 156-157, 195,
337-338, 397-398

Location, 130, 137

LCD, 223

LPD, 163, 167, 172, 380

LCD Panel, 225, 415
Left frame, 130

Low Toner Alert Msg, 395

Legal, 197

M

Length Guide, 33

MAC Address, 161, 168

Letter, 197

Maintenance, 439
Manual Duplex Printing, 218

512

Index

Margin Left/Right, 141-142,
151-152, 248, 364, 368

Network Connection Setup, 74

Margin Middle, 141-142,
151-152, 249, 364, 368

Network printing, 69

Margin Top/Bottom, 141-142,
151-152, 247, 363, 368

Network Firmware Version, 137
Network Type, 161, 168
New Password, 149

Max E-Mail Size, 142, 152

No carbon required, 191

Max EMail Size, 369

No. of Sheets, 138

Memory, 430

Non-Dell Toner, 145, 159, 341,
401

Memory Capacity, 137
Menu button, 225, 415
Menu Item, 133

Number of Copies, 238
Numeric keypad, 224

Menu Settings, 139, 324
MIB Compatibility, 430

O

mm/inch, 140, 148, 395

OCR, 191

Modem Speed, 144, 155, 293,
389

One Touch Dial button, 223

Monarch, 197
Monarch LEF, 197

Online Help, 126, 131
Online Services, 503

MPF Extension, 33

Operating System
Compatibility, 429

Multiple Up, 440

Operation, 431

Multiple-Up, 141, 151, 245, 363

Operator Panel, 33, 223
Button, 223

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF), 33,
461

N
NCR, 191
Network, 375

Optical character
recognition, 191
Order Supplies at, 126, 131
Original Type, 140, 150, 242, 361
OS, 430
Other Features, 178
Index

513

Out of Paper Tone, 139, 147

Parts name, 33

Output Result, 138

PDL, 430

Output Tray, 136

Peer-to-Peer, 112

Output Tray Extension, 221

Phone Book, 375

Owner, 138

Phone Connector, 34, 44, 48, 432
Plain, 144-145, 156-157,
337-338, 397-398

P
Page Display Format, 129

Plain Thick, 145, 156-157,
337-338, 397-398

Panel Alert Tone, 139, 147

Point and Print, 109

Panel Language, 140, 148, 405

Port Settings, 163, 166

Panel Lock, 402, 405

Port Status, 163, 167

Panel Lock Set, 140

Port9100, 163, 167, 172, 380

Panel Settings, 147, 373

Power on Wizard, 396

Panel Settings Page, 225

Power Saver Time, 391

Paper, 189
Characteristics, 189
Curl, 189
Fiber Content, 190
Grain Direction, 190
Moisture Content, 190
Smoothness, 190
Weight, 189

Power Saver Timer, 250

Paper Chute, 34

Prefix, 293

Paper Density, 144, 155, 336, 397

Prefix Dial, 143, 155, 293, 388

Paper Feed Roller, 34

Prefix Dial Num, 388

Paper jam location, 460

Prefix Dial Number, 144, 155,
293

Paper Type, 198
Paper Used, 179
Paper Width Guides, 33
514

Index

Power Saver Timer - Deep
Sleep, 139, 147
Power Saver Timer - Sleep, 139,
147
Power Supply, 429
Power Switch, 33

Premier, 146
Print Cartridge Level, 136

Print from USB, 140, 149

Printer Software, 409

Print Head Cleaning Rod, 33

Printer specification, 429

Print Media
Dimensions, 201

Printer Status, 125, 131, 135-136

Print media, 189, 440

Printing, 229

Print Quality Guarantee, 431

Printing on Letterhead, 192

Print Quality Problems, 480

Printing problem, 478

Print Server Reports, 161

Printing Speed, 136

Print Server Settings, 125, 131,
160, 165

Printing Status Window, 409

Print Server Setup Page, 161
Print Volume, 125, 131, 179
Printer Driver Pre-install
Status, 69
Printer Drivers (Macintosh)
Installing Printer Drivers, 117

Printer Type, 136

Printing with WSD, 425
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), 33
Processor Speed, 137
Product Features, 29
Product Information Guide, 26
Protocol Monitor, 293, 374

Printer Drivers Installing, 69
Printer Events, 136
Printer Information, 126, 131,
137, 323
Printer Jobs, 125, 131, 137

Q
Quick Launch Utility, 410
Quick Reference Guide, 25

Printer Maintenance, 155
Printer Media, 189
Printer Page Count, 179
Printer Revision Levels, 137
Printer Serial Number, 137
Printer Settings, 125, 131, 138,
147
Printer Settings Report, 139

R
Ready / Error LED, 223, 415
Rear Cover, 34, 460
Receive Mode, 142, 153, 291,
381
Recommended Paper, 190
Recycled, 145, 156, 337-338, 398
Index

515

Recycling Information, 504

Return Policy, 504

Re-dial / Pause button, 224

Right Frame, 132

Redial Attempts, 143, 154, 292,
384

Ring Tone Volume, 143, 154,
292, 383

Redial Delay, 143, 154, 292, 384

Ringer Volume, 290

Reduce/Enlarge, 140, 150, 240,
360
Re-enter Password, 149

S

Refresh, 132

Safety information, 26

Refresh Mode, 357

Scan button, 225

Registration Adjustment, 338

Scan Defaults, 142, 151, 345

Regular, 146

Scan Service Lock Set, 140, 149

Relative humidity, 431

Scan To Network, 142, 151, 364

Remote Rcv Tone, 292, 385

Scan to PC, 177

Remote Receive, 143, 154, 292,
384

ScanButton Manager, 413

Remote Receive Tone, 143, 154

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility
Problems, 499

Removing the Toner
Cartridges, 441

ScanDirect, 413

Scanner Unit, 460

Report Page, 232

Scanning Problems, 496

Reports, 146, 327

Secure Receive, 149, 403

Resend Delay, 143, 154, 292, 384

Secure Receive Set, 140, 149

Reset Defaults, 158, 340

Secure Settings, 140, 148, 402

Reset Print Server, 178

Security Settings, 169

Reset Wireless, 379

Security Slot, 34

Resetting Defaults, 357, 407

Select Reorder URL, 146

Resolution, 142, 151-152, 298,
366, 369

Selecting Letterhead, 192

Restore Settings, 132
516

Index

Selecting Paper, 191
Selecting Preprinted Media, 192

Selecting Pre-Punched
Paper, 193

Speed Dial button, 224

Sending a Fax, 296

Start, 224

Sending a Fax
Automatically, 299
Sending a Fax Manually, 300
Sending print job, 229
Sent Fax Forward, 143, 154
Server Address, 184-185
Service Code, 27
Service Tag, 27, 396
Set Date, 146
Set Password, 126, 131, 178

SSID, 161, 168
Start button, 224, 415
Status Messenger, 167
Status Monitor Console, 409
Status of printer supplies, 439
Storage, 431
Storage humidity range, 431
Storing consumables, 440
Storing Print Media, 196, 229,
440

Set Time, 146

Support
Contacting Dell, 504

Setting, 439

Supported Paper Size, 196

Setting Copy Options, 238
Setting the Printer ID, 287

System Settings, 139, 146-147,
166, 333, 373

Setting the Time and Date, 288

System Settings page, 146

Setting Your Country, 286

system settings page, 124

Setup diagram, 26
Sharpness, 140, 142, 150, 152,
244, 362, 367
SMB Client, 164

T
TCP/IP, 170

SNMP, 163, 167, 175

TCP/IP Settings, 162, 171, 328,
342

SNMP UDP, 380

TCP/IP settings page, 124

Software Update, 410

TEL Mode, 291

Speaker Volume, 289

TEL/FAX Mode, 291

Speed Dial, 375

Telephone, 153
Index

517

Temperature, 431

USB Settings
USB Port, 404

Time Format, 146

USB storage device, 280

Time Zone, 146

User Setup Disk Creating
Tool, 413

Telephone/Fax, 153

Time-Out, 163, 173
Tone/Pulse, 143, 154, 292, 383

Using Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool, 125

Toner Access Cover, 33
Toner Refresh, 158, 399
Top frame, 129
Transfer Belt, 34
Transfer Roller, 34
Transmit Key, 161
Trap Notification (IP), 177
Tray 1 Custom Size - X, 146
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y, 146

W
Wall Jack Connector, 34, 44, 48,
432
Warranty, 504
Warranty information, 26
Web Link Customization, 146,
160, 342

Tray 1 Paper Size, 146

WEP 128 Bit ASCII (13
Bytes), 169

Tray 1 Paper Type, 146

WEP 128 Bit Hex (26 Bytes), 169

Tray Settings, 126, 131, 146, 186,
328, 371

WEP 64 Bit ASCII (5 Bytes), 169

TWAIN, 255

White Document Cover, 455

WEP 64 Bit Hex (10 Bytes), 169
White Strip, 455
Width guide, 205

U
Unacceptable Paper, 191
UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
RESTRICTED RIGHTS, 22

Windows Image Acquisition
(WIA), 257

USB, 432

Wired Network
Ethernet, 375
Initialize NVM, 381
Protocol, 380

USB port, 34, 44

Wireless LAN, 167

518

Index

Wireless Settings, 161, 168
Wireless Setup, 376
WPA2-PSK AES, 169
WPA-RSK TKIP, 169
WSD, 163, 167, 173

Y
Yellow terminator, 49

Index

519

520

Index



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Dell Inc.
Title                           : Dell 1355cnw User's Guide
Subject                         : User's Guide
Description                     : User's Guide
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.3.3 (Windows); modified using iTextSharp 5.1.3 (c) 1T3XT BVBA
Keywords                        : Model#setup#connections#software#drivers#paper#media#esuprt_printers_main#esuprt_printers_color_laser#Dell 1355cn/cnw Color Laser Printer#dell-1355cn-cwn#User's Guide
Create Date                     : 2010:10:04 08:57:03Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Modify Date                     : 2017:02:13 12:00:57-06:00
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 522
Author                          : Dell Inc.
Productcode                     : dell-1355cn-cwn
Typecode                        : ug
Typedescription                 : User's Guide
Languagecodes                   : en-us
Sectioncode                     : 
Sectiondescription              : 
Publishdate                     : 2017-02-13 00:00:00
Expirydate                      : 9999-09-09 00:00:00
Manualurl                       : http://downloads.dell.com/Manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers_color_laser/dell-1355cn-cwn_User%27s%20Guide_en-us.pdf
Readytocopy                     : false
Futureproductindication         : No
Categorypathforfutureproducts   : 
Businesskeywords                : Model#setup#connections#software#drivers#paper#media
Filesize                        : 44198
Creationdate                    : D:20101004085703Z
Moddate                         : D:20170213065223-06'00'
Isrestricted                    : False
Productpath                     : 

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools